[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2001024600A2 - Network arrangement, station for wireless switching, and port unit therefor - Google Patents

Network arrangement, station for wireless switching, and port unit therefor Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2001024600A2
WO2001024600A2 PCT/SE2000/001950 SE0001950W WO0124600A2 WO 2001024600 A2 WO2001024600 A2 WO 2001024600A2 SE 0001950 W SE0001950 W SE 0001950W WO 0124600 A2 WO0124600 A2 WO 0124600A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
stations
wireless
station
switching
network
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/SE2000/001950
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2001024600A9 (en
WO2001024600A3 (en
Inventor
Karl-Axel ÅHL
Original Assignee
Fiberless Society Sverige Ab
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Fiberless Society Sverige Ab filed Critical Fiberless Society Sverige Ab
Priority to AU79801/00A priority Critical patent/AU7980100A/en
Publication of WO2001024600A2 publication Critical patent/WO2001024600A2/en
Publication of WO2001024600A3 publication Critical patent/WO2001024600A3/en
Publication of WO2001024600A9 publication Critical patent/WO2001024600A9/en

Links

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W40/00—Communication routing or communication path finding
    • H04W40/02—Communication route or path selection, e.g. power-based or shortest path routing
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L45/00—Routing or path finding of packets in data switching networks
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L47/00—Traffic control in data switching networks
    • H04L47/10—Flow control; Congestion control
    • H04L47/38—Flow control; Congestion control by adapting coding or compression rate
    • Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02D—CLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
    • Y02D30/00—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
    • Y02D30/70—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks

Definitions

  • This invention relates to a new physical and logical communications network and an architecture based on adoption of stations with wireless communication and switching between ports.
  • the network solution could typically be implemented as a terrestrial network servicing multiple users at scattered locations.
  • the invention offers principally any type of digital communication and/or distribution including broadband services by connecting users or applications at multiple stations' locations in an area which may be local or regional when applied as a terrestrial network.
  • the network flexibility, capacity and capabilities are capable of growing as the number of stations is increasing.
  • the invention provides a self-generating capability expansion the more the network i.e. the more stations is growing.
  • Stations include means for wireless communication between station sites, including very high capacity (in relation to the capacity per port) and fast switching function capability to switch and route digital data between sites through pairs of ports arranged for selected transfer capacity and to achieve seamless transparent flows of data with principally negligible time delay for the respective user data flows routed through such station.
  • Wireless transmission through each pair of ports through the air includes conversion of digital information to be applied on one or more carriers. These carriers are up- or down-converted to suitable high frequencies including radio bands and/or laser frequencies.
  • the invention also relates to practical system implementations, and a primary focus has been laid on connectionless Ethernet and IP protocol switching and/routing as it ideally combined with the invention.
  • the invention does not exclude use of other switching solutions like ATM.
  • conversion enabling transfer of other types of signals than the used switching platform is described.
  • Methods used in fixed terrestrial communication systems including wireless methods for transferring digital information for data and telecommunication applications varies typically depending on transfer requirements. Synchronous, asynchronous, symmetric or asymmetric transmission are typically arranged in different ways.
  • One prior method is to establish fixed connections without bandwidth variation for any uplink or downlink direction as it is done with point - point radio links. These are typically used for bit transparent continuous flows and no bandwidth or capacity variation between applications regardless of traffic demands or if interference occurs.
  • Another prior method is to arrange a wireless access structure (fixed and/or mobile applications) where a station (central/base) is connected to a high capacity backbone network for a number of geographically scattered telecommunication users' via remote wireless terminals.
  • a station central/base
  • a high capacity backbone network for a number of geographically scattered telecommunication users' via remote wireless terminals.
  • a central wireless node is accessing users to another network (typically backbone) via wireless terminals placed at or near the location of the users.
  • another network typically backbone
  • repeaters with or without drop and insert traffic capabilities may be used to expand the coverage in cases where the central node is not able to connect directly.
  • the user at the end in these cases has a simple radio terminal which does not need advanced functionality and the central or base station includes connection to one switching and/or routing platforms.
  • the capacity and means (radio etc.) of a central station are shared by a group of terminals arranged in various schemes, typically arranged in a star topology point-multipoint (P-MP) but also more complex topologies exist.
  • the access solutions includes typically sharing in time, frequency and codes TDMA, FDMA, CDMA or combinations thereof in order to share common equipment and radio transmission capacity among multiple users, with variable capacity demands for each connection.
  • SDMA is provided by steerable (narrow) antenna beams applied in order to save spectrum, allow more users, increase the transmission speed, and decrease the influence of multi-path propagation.
  • the invention offers a wireless solution including: establishment of connection of backbone solutions to other systems, accesses to other switching and /or routing platforms, switched connections between base stations or similar of internal inherent and/or external wireless access solutions and/or communications between users in wireless system including inherent Internet network functionality and/or with users in inherent or external wireless access solutions (including radio Ian, WLAN) fixed as well as mobile and, connections between connected users connected within a wireless solution to applications outside of such system.
  • Backbone solutions and user traffic capability and inherent Internet capability transfer refer to digital transmission connection of capacities required for speech, video conferencing and media distribution from kbit to few Mbit/s (like El/Tl, E2/T2, E3/T3, 10 Mbit/s) up to at least 100 Mbit/s, 25, 52, 155 Mbit/s (STM-1 SDH ATM or SONET transfer capacities) and gradually up to at least 1000 Mbit/s or more in order to include through broadband traffic and simultaneous multi user performance for media entertainment and business traffic.
  • transfer rates towards and including 1000 Mbit/s or multiples of it may be applicable in radio and/or laser transmission applications via the wireless ports of the wireless system which inherently also is designed to be capable of supporting both high speed and secure communication arrangements.
  • the invention includes support of single and/or groups of users and communications services similar to leased lines or similar to virtual leased lines (with varying demands and capacity over time) between external applications and users ranging from a simple voice IP to advanced Internet video streaming services like product animations and entertainment films, news gathering etc. requiring up to one Mbit/s or 10 Mbit/s or much more per individual user on demand.
  • the invention provides various routing alternatives in order to improve transfer capacity in a network implemented, gain improved frequency re-use capability, gain security etc.
  • the invention is shown realised into systems based on fast connectionless type of switching.
  • This type of switching function is shown to include adaptive wireless communication means between selected pairs of ports.
  • Packet-oriented transmission services including control of various Internet Protocol (IP) based solutions are supported.
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • This include means to support of interactive bursted data traffic exemplified by TCP/IP protocol or similar.
  • the invention handles IP based real time synchronous or seamless synchronism or near real-time IP protocols in order to support continuous streams of data typically required for voice and/or image transfer through such wireless systems.
  • a station is considered combined with at least one high capacity switch function with comprehensive switching and/or routing functionalities between User Ports or Terminal Ports (UPs or TPs) and Wireless Ports (WPs).
  • a WP contains at least one wireless receiver and transmitter and modulator-demodulator (modem) and means to optimise transfer rate, quality etc. between WPs.
  • Modem modulator-demodulator
  • Means are included for coordination of physical bandwidth to optimise frequency re-use, organise communication between each pair of WPs and UPs / TPs.
  • Such means include selective adoption of more than one sub-carrier, selection of transmission speed on sub-carriers or sub-channels at least for radio transmission.
  • Means are included to signal information from packet data including real time IP and/or interactive IP data to be transferred through WPs to detect the bandwidth or capacity transfer requirement between each pair of WPs based on the information derived from the inherent switch (routing) function and transfer such information to respective WP and/or WPs involved in the transaction to make it possible to adopt to required capacity and quality performance.
  • Means are inherently included at each WP to receive control information and/or transmit control information i.e. to select carrier and/or sub-carrier set number of carriers (bandwidth), adjust speed, adjust selective sub-channel level (to meet quality and/or standard spectrum mask performance), adjust error correction to meet appropriate quality performance, and adjust frequency on individual carriers and/or groups of carriers.
  • the invention enables traffic and/or distribution of data between stations to be switched/routed effectively between the wireless ports and the user or terminal ports based on the route needed, bandwidth availability, terrain and line of sight situation, redundant routing for security and/or capacity and/or based on sharing of frequency spectrum requirement in space with others to avoid degradation interference.
  • Data is switched, routed, dropped, or inserted at any place where a station exists.
  • each new station inherently increases the total capacity, total wireless capacity and increases routing capability and in fact potential re-use efficiency in an area as means for adopting to new routing alternatives or set-ups and variable transmission performance capabilities is applied such as control of OFDM modems and transmitted energy and new direction alternatives when new stations are inserted.
  • the implementation of the method as described based on fast switches includes the possibility to establish principally unrestricted communications network topologies over relatively large areas locally regionally i.e. from about a few meters to tens of kilometres or more (before traffic is trunked through other backbone solutions like fibre etc. to another area) because the design of the switching function is such that a negligible time delay loss is achievable using fast connectionless switch platforms.
  • Fast switching means a relatively short time delay per station in relation to the communication services that are transferred and passing stations. For dual communication like speech- or video telephony 4-5 ms may be required in total. As an example, this allows 100 microseconds per station when up to about 40 - 50 hops in total are taking part in an eventual conversation.
  • high speed switching capacity performance is applied, in comparison to the traffic transfer capacity between each pair of WPs, at least at stations through which traffic shall be routed, thus allowing potentially multiple WPs to be applied in various directions to scattered stations and users.
  • This further improves the possibilities to re-use frequency spectrum more efficiently in particular when directed antenna beams are being used for communication between wireless ports. Due to the increased separation in elevations of beams, the more stations used in an area the more frequency resource sharing is optimised in such area.
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
  • variable WPs can be working in accordance with different radio transmission and radio access standard requirements including means in OFDM modems enabling to select directly and/or control remotely via network management functions and/or automatically depending on bandwidth and/or capacity and/or quality requirement.
  • the invention enables resource-sharing in wireless ports with methods such as TDMA, FDMA, CDMA and spread spectrum Frequency Hopping as in the radiolan access standard IEEE 802.11 traditionally used for access radio solutions with or without SDMA.
  • means using OFDM modems to perform traffic flows between radio based WPs is applicable to perform communication between WPs including means to control bandwidth, speed, transmission power, quality, standard emulation etc.
  • the invention provides for assigning of selected activation and number of selected sub-channels (and/or sub-carriers) allowing gradual selection of the required bandwidth and transfer capacity between each pair of ports. It includes inherently or actively further means for adjustments between each pair of ports; possible selection of modulation level per sub-channel, error correction per subchannel, transmission power regulation per sub-channel and groups of channels in relation to transfer quality performance requirements, hop lengths, speed requirements, control of actual frequency spectrum performance requirement, adoption to wireless access or radio link spectrum and/or such equipment standard performance requirements, climate factors, terrain, redundancy routes based on bit error rate performance requirements and/or capacity requirement.
  • control functions may be realised as automatic or manual or a combination via network management functions which includes SNMP adoption and IP communication capability between an external data network and the switch at any station and its connected WPs via IP protocols.
  • Multiple carriers as used in OFDM has several advantages allowing much higher robustness against multipath influence (delay spread) with relatively longer time lengths on high level modem methods in comparison to single carriers. It has however some drawbacks as the radio transceivers have to take into consideration peak powers which may occur instantly. Effective precautions to eliminate and/or minimise these peak power effects are included like Coded ODFM.
  • Another advantage of using multi carriers in general via OFDM and/or Coded OFDM and/or generally other means is that less noise in its respective sub-channel occur than in a corresponding wider band single carrier channel. This is usable to bridge either longer hops or use correspondingly more complex modulation methods which would increase the potential transfer rate (on the same bit error rate quality) per channel on the same hop lengths.
  • the invention includes means to arrange functionalities for stations to virtually act as central stations (base stations) and/or terminal stations corresponding to wireless access systems based on various equipment resource sharing and capacity sharing principles.
  • network stations include means for virtually acting as one or multiple access solutions in P-MP and/or MP modes and/or transparent to radio link solutions with variable bandwidth requirements.
  • wireless intends to include any kind of electromagnetic transmission through the air including transmission systems in radio frequency bands as well as light wave and/or laser technologies in suitable wavelengths for air transmission.
  • light wave or laser communication has a narrower beam than a directed radio antenna, which leads to significantly less degradation effect by multipath reflections typical in radio transmission for high speed transfer.
  • Laser has thus a potential possibility to support higher transmission channel speeds on each carrier. Speeds like 1000 Mbit/s or in fact higher speed, should such standards occur in connectionless communications, are possible. As an example these could be based on wavelength multiplexing technology. Laser communication does not typically require a licence. Risk of severe interference would normally not occur between stations.
  • Radio has its advantages and the invention enables a combination of the two transmission systems.
  • the combination would allow communication of both radio and light-waves in parallel on the same routes and/or via different routes between stations, including laser transmission WPs that are backed by radio transmission WPs either to work in parallel or being used when required.
  • the invention provides for setting of transfer capacity via network management functions and/or possible automatic regulation of transfer capacity for the different types of real time and interactive transfer at the respective involved WPs. It includes further quality transfer settings between pairs of ports and defines possible selections of routes and other functions specifically mentioned for interacting and assigning transfer speed based on data derived from traffic at selected switches or switches for traffic requirement passing respective WPs.
  • the invention provides a non-hierarchical wireless topology and internal switching capability within the network and it allow access between any two stations if air communication i.e. line of sight is possible. This is important as it saves spectrum and investments reduce equipment costs and speed up new infrastructure for broadband access requirement. This is different in comparison to standard wireless access system (in particular P-MP topologies) where terminal stations are not allowed to talk to each other.
  • TDMA dynamic time sharing
  • SDMA space sharing mechanisms
  • the present invention provides a station for wireless switching and communication comprising: at least one wireless port (WP) for wireless communication with another station; at least one port (UP/TP) for communication with a user or a network; and an internal switching unit for switching (routing) traffic between stations and/or ports.
  • WP wireless port
  • UP/TP port
  • UP/TP port
  • UP/TP port
  • UP/TP port
  • UP/TP port
  • an internal switching unit for switching (routing) traffic between stations and/or ports.
  • the wireless port has a controllable bandwidth e.g. by means of an OFDM modem, wherein the bandwidth utilised by the modem is controlled by varying the number of subchannels used, varying the modulation level, varying the transmission power, and/or varying the error correction.
  • the wireless port may be capable of emulating various wireless standards and protocols and resource sharing schemes such as FDMA, TDMA, CDMA or combinations of them.
  • the station further comprises a network management port (NMP) for communication with an external network management unit.
  • NMP network management port
  • the switching unit is adapted both to connectionless and circuit-oriented switching and conversion therebetween, wherein the connectionless switching is based on packet switching and/or IP protocols, and the circuit-oriented switching is based on ATM.
  • the present invention is also directed to a network for wireless switching and communication comprising a number of stations of the above type, further comprising a network management unit capable of adding and deleting stations in the network.
  • some stations are capable of functioning as repeating and terminal stations.
  • an external switching unit is provided for controlling the internal switching units of the stations.
  • the external switching unit is adapted to set up alternative routes between stations.
  • complementary parallel routes are set up between pairs of stations.
  • One complementary parallel route may be a radio channel, e.g. low bandwidth microwave, and the other complementary parallel route may be a high bandwidth laser channel.
  • a wireless port may be adapted to work as a central for other wireless ports, sharing its capacity with a number of underlying wireless ports, such underlying wireless ports being able to commonly share its capacity with the central wireless port.
  • a wireless port, which is sharing its capacity with other stations, and working as an underlying wireless port to these other stations may adapted to share its transmission resource capacity with other stations as a central.
  • a wireless port which is working as an underlying station towards a central may be adapted to work as an underlying wireless port to other central wireless ports.
  • the network is capable of emulating generic access systems.
  • a wireless port is adapted to be connected to one station and virtually work as a standard terminal to another manufacturer's base station.
  • the present invention is also directed to a port unit for wireless switching and communication for connection to a station of the above type.
  • the port unit comprises a modem and a radio unit and is arranged to be controlled by a control program through the station to which it is connected.
  • This invention describes a method for realisations into practical system establishing a new physical and logical implementations, a primer focus has been laid communications network and architecture on connectionless Ethernet and IP protocol based on adoption of wireless communication switching and/routing as it ideally combined and switching between ports.
  • the network with the method However the method, sub- solution could typically be implemented as a methods, etc. does not excludes use of other terrestrial network servicing multiple users at switching solutions like ATM etc.
  • scattered locations However airborne conversion of transfer requirement of other locations of stations carried by various types of types of signals than the used switching aircraft's, balloons etc. and/or satellite based platform and/or is described. etc. variations is applicable should it be required.
  • Methods used in fixed terrestrial communication systems including wireless
  • This document is describing a method with data & telecommunication applications varies complementary methods, which makes it typically depending on transfer requirement. possible to offer digital broadband services by Synchronous, asynchronous, symmetric or of connecting users at multiple stations locations asymmetric transmission are typically arranged in an area.
  • One method is to establish capabilities are capable to grow as the number fixed connections without bandwidth variation of station are expanding thanks to the for any uplink or down link direction as it is principles used on the contrary too earlier done with point - point radio links.
  • These are methods and/or systems known. In fact it leads typically used for bit transparent continuous to a self-generating capability expansion the flows between applications regardless of traffic more the network is growing, here coned to demands.
  • Wireless - Self-Expansion Network Switching Another method is to arrange a wireless W-SENS. access structure (fixed and/or mobile applications) where a station (central/base) is
  • Stations include means for wireless connected to a high capacity backbone communication between station sites, including network for a number of geographically vary high capacity (typically in relation to traffic scattered telecommunications users wireless transferred capacity per station connection) terminals.
  • the communication between fast switching function capability to switch and central/base and terminal stations operates in or route digital data between sites through pair TDMA, FDMA or CDMA or combinations of of ports arranged for selected transfer them.
  • Spatial division (SDMA) may be capacity.
  • Wireless transmission through each arranged by controlling antenna beams to point pair of ports through the air includes in directions of each communication conversion of digital information to be applied requirement. on one or more carriers.
  • RL The Radio Link
  • RL consisting of a direct line or down converted to suitable high frequency of site connection or multiple hops in a electro-magnetic carrier frequency from repeated chain and/or loops and/or branch including radio bands and/or above, including structure via multiplexing/de-multiplexing laser frequencies etc. arrangement.
  • ETSI/BRAN, HA or HL ETSI/BRAN, HA or HL
  • ETSI/BRAN, HA or HL ETSI/BRAN, HA or HL
  • States are LMDS solutions or IEEE 802.11 or In this description is also shown a number of 803.16 mentioned.
  • added methods which are considered Typical transmission applications could require which variable capacity demands for each balanced (equal capacity in both directions) but connection.
  • SDMA unbalanced (unequal capacity in up or down arranged by steerable (narrow) antenna beams link) communication is getting more and more applied in order to save spectrum, allow more used in particular in modern access. users, increase the transmission speed, Considering access systems, a central decrease influence of multi-path etc.
  • wireless node is accessing users to another network (typically backbone) via wireless
  • the communication solutions based terminals placed at or near the location of the on radio links offer integrated service users.
  • repeaters may be used to adaptable capacity, multiple path capability, or expand the coverage in cases where the increasing capabilities adaptive for multi-user central node do not radio optically are able to connection requirements etc. directly connect.
  • these access solutions supports an all to all communication mode as in a mesh
  • Digital wireless media distribution system are network topology structure, or support the typically considered separate solutions from capacity typically offered via radio links to these mentioned solutions above in that they multiple users, or including network capability have been focused on operating in broadcast in is self. Neither does a combination of them. mode. I.e. these may be aimed to transmit huge information in the direction (unbalanced) No wireless method and/or system solution where multiple scattered users are located exists which both is effectively operational to (from a central node -downlink) and eventually offer backbone solutions to other systems, less information could be arranged in a return accesses to other switching platforms, channel (uplink), if such exists.
  • connection capacities means from few Mbit/s vary in time and direction, which should be (like E1/T1 , E2/T2, E3/T3, 10 Mbit/s) up to at handled properly in order to make it possible to least 100 Mbit/s, 25, 52, 155 Mbit/s (STM-1 utilise spectrum effectively and improve the SDH ATM or SONET transfer capacities).
  • STM-1 STM-1 utilise spectrum effectively and improve the SDH ATM or SONET transfer capacities.
  • Connecting functionality and the central or base station an apartment block could mean requirement of includes connection to switching and/or routing 100 Mbit/s or more.
  • the method and system platforms. based on the methods concerned is applicable
  • radio etc. means (radio etc.) of a central station shared
  • a central station shared
  • Internet service providers corporate schemes, typically arranged in a star topology networks etc. or mobile operator including W- point-multipoint (P-MP) nut also more complex CDMA base station transmission.
  • P-MP W- point-multipoint
  • the method and sub-method including ability through) for other systems, connections and to various routing alternatives in order to internal switching between users located at improve transfer capacity in a network any station. implemented, gain improved frequency re-use capability, gain security etc.
  • the use of packet data oriented The method is shown realised into systems connectionless switching capability at each based on fast connectionless type of switching station is shown typically closely integrated as it is exemplified in this document. with wireless transmission facilities (as This type of switching function is shown to wireless ports, examples fig 1 ,2,3,4,5,6, 16, include adaptive wireless communication 17a, 17b, 18... 33 etc.). It includes potentially means between selected pair of ports.
  • IP Internet Protocols
  • Means are included for co-ordination of physical bandwidth to optimise frequency reTo create access, backbone and connections use, organise communication between each for various connectionless type of switched pair of WPs and Ups, Further to organise the traffic seamless continuous streams of data sum of pair of WPs to achieve appropriate typically for telecommunications trunks etc. quality, transfer capacity in total an any area leads to difficulties or design considerations. where such system is implemented.
  • Such The disadvantage with standard packet data means include selective adoption of more than protocols to fully and absolutely securely one sub-carrier, variations capability selection transparency transfer information without of transmission speed on sub-carriers or subloosing data is to be weighted against the channels.
  • the method and sub-methods could flexibility connectionless switching.
  • a method than effectively be implemented as a new type and means to secure such synchronous data of comprehensive wireless network system transfer is to assign transfer bandwidth through serving multiple users in an area. It would not the air between the respective WPs to get enough assurance of not loosing data, us real It includes assign of all or part of the traffic in time type of IP protocols use of priorities for such network or to be logically combined with such traffic etc by the IP protocols external switching platform (example fig 18) at any location or to multiple external switching
  • the implementation of the method as locations service platform nodes containing described based on fast switches includes the access, backbone and internal traffic capability possibility to establish principally unrestricted wirelessly Local traffic may by switched communications network topologies because optionally in addition via a switch function the design of the switching function are such principally available at all locations where a that a neglected time delay loss is achievable station is located, example 2 at fig 4 or 2' or 2" using fast connectionless switch platforms like at fig 16
  • multiple services similar to CXe-16 Further means to a connectionless what is possible via standard switching/routing approach includes that scattered stations platforms is effectively obtainable by arranging principally "all stations" placed a locations that communication between the stations (10
  • the WPs include modem, signalling Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) type of processing units and electronics and functions circuit or cell oriented or connection types of to arrange appropriate air protocols, switching or other switching methods. standardised or proprietary. If transmission The method and other methods related is in functions and switching functions etc. (see this more detailed system implementation figure 33) are realised in highly integrated examples in this description is mainly electronic devices in ASICs, FPGAs, DSPs, concentration on the implementations including MMICs combined if necessary with discrete combined use of switches and/or routers radio components filters etc. it could be typically implemented capable of handling data arranged and mounted directly at the back of flows between such as Ethernet, Fast Ethernet an radio antenna and take very little space. In and Gigabit Ethernet ports connected.
  • ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
  • the volumes could the cost of such physical units high speed switch functions (Fast and Giga) be marginal, as any other commercial could be considered fast switches capable of electronic item.
  • the stations are further keeping the switching time low and relatively arranged so that the full use the transmission constant in order to support streams through capacity of a each pair of one or multiple WPs each switch with neglected delay in order to could be used, instead of sharing radio effectively transfer seamless synchronous channel capacity (and radio head) as in the transmissions transparently through multiple case with traditional radio access TDMA, stations.
  • These capabilities could typically be CDMA, FDMA.
  • the W-SENS solution has needed to seamless transparently handle both further a benefit in comparison with the typical telecommunications flows of data traditional wireless access approach today through such system and typical burst where wireless terminals under a base stations interactive type of data effectively.
  • An example is designed only for access when it have no of one of many possible implementations is to network intelligence, switching capabilities combine a switch function capable of handling which enable intelligent repeating capability.
  • at least multiple fast Ethernet but preferably for very high capacity capability Gigabit
  • the method include a possibility to add a sub- Ethernet switches) port rates and assigned to it method where the share of a WPs radio one or a selected number of WPs.
  • each station limited to 4 gradually potentially increasing the actual WPs only.
  • Scenery of a gradual capacity transfer capability in the air and on the implementation into such network is ground. demonstrated by fig. 22 a and b. I.e. number of possible stations superseding the level
  • W-SENS includes options means for virtual from their location serve 30 more and these 30 operating as multiple functions similar to P-P could serve another 30 etc.
  • These example radio links by adoption of UPs and assignment shows that it could lead to a more or less of enough transfer capacity between involved unlimited number of possible stations and pair of WPs for a seamless bit and/or byte extreme high traffic transfer capacity via the air transparent transfer between UPs.
  • any geographical area like a city, sub-urban includes means to arrange functionality's for or rural environment.
  • a W-SENS network stations include where pairs of WPs are isolated effectively means for virtually acting as one or multiple from other pairs of WPs in space by their access solutions in P-MP and/or MP modes position, transmission elevation and directed and/or transparent radio link solution, see antenna laser beams etc.
  • the fact that it includes means for emulating transmission power required and the more these other functions, its own network possibilities to connect others or route traffic to functionality's, means to operate as backbone to other external access systems etc. leads to further significant advantages of The functional method and means the W-SENS approach in comparisons.
  • W-SENS implemented into systems W-SENS include
  • the method and sub-methods include means means to support much higher bandwidth to to conform W-SENS to act as various existing multiple scattered users via air transmission and evolving wireless standards of solutions from any station in comparison to wireless mentioned in the areas mentioned above an in access mentioned.
  • the method which include addition work on its own conditions in addition, possibility to combine distant wireless superseding the existing solutions.
  • switching routing capability with local switching It includes means for internal operation in the between ports which may or may not be modes similar to radio links, laser links, TDMA, including wireless ports, see fig. 17 a, b and fig FDMA and CDMA including spatial 18. arrangements. I.e.
  • wireless means including WPs arranged in P-MP mode of operations any kind of electromagnetic transmission between WPs in FDMA, TDMA, CDMA through the air including transmission systems schemes or combinations with or without in radio frequency bands as well as laser spatial coverage by directed antenna beams, technologies in suitable wavelengths for air etc. transmission.
  • a reason for including laser communication is several, in spite of its hop
  • Every new station added results in a possible length limitations under certain air conditions.
  • increase of wireless switching capacity by One is because it has a narrower beam than a each such station.
  • Each station connected in a directed radio antenna, which leads to W-SENS including wireless switching and/or significantly less degradation effect by routing capability is arranged with means to multipath reflections typical in radio arrange one or more additional connection by transmission for high speed transfer.
  • Laser has adding WPs and establishes connections with thus a potential possibility to support higher other stations.
  • Functional method and means transmission channel speeds like 1000 Mbit s to arrange communication selected transfer or in fact higher speed should such standards rates is included as sub-methods to the occur in connectionless communications. method.
  • sub-methods include selection Laser communication does not require a of variable transfer rate selection (speed) by licence, Risk of severe interfering would changing modem level and bandwidth normally not occur between stations. adoptions in addition in accordance to, transfer rate required, bandwidth available, transfer Radio has its advantages and the method quality performance needs etc. between each include sub-methods for combing the two pair of WPs and/or UPs and/or TPs. transmission systems. I.e. by including means to use the best from the two possibilities. Such
  • a W-SENS implementation compete or cope with other types of radio includes laser transmission WPs that are methods mentioned. I.e. fixed standard P-P backed by radio transmission WPs either to radio links (including new p-p solutions like work in parallel or being used when required. WinNet, 100 Mbit/s links), laser links etc. This includes the possibility to use more than Examples of some broadband fixed wireless one route between stations and/or WPs for access solutions presently under redundancy or other purposes (see just one standardisation for interoperability capability example of many possible in fig 23).
  • ETSI/BRAN HiperAccess, HiperLan, (and/or IEEE 802.11 , 802.16 etc. in US).
  • WPs include possible use of fully transparent Other standards to cope with are ETSI TM4 speeds between switches and/or selectable co-existence standards for wireless access rates.
  • station WPs may be interconnected and radio relays.
  • TSR 34 Siemens - laser frequencies could be chosen (to be WalkAir, SR 500, Netro, and other products of applied) for fixed capacity transfer capability wireless access type where radio channels and i.e.
  • wireless networking handle fixed and variable capacity between means for multiple connections, accesses, WPs in P-P and/or P-MP mode, in time, at backbone, distribution, internal services, etc. selected frequencies and/or codes.
  • Fixed an a comprehensive gradually expandable bandwidth could typically applied for laser network in any environment and to principally irrespective of variable traffic demand, as any end existing of foreseeable future user spectrum space is less critical in comparison to requirement is applicable by the use of W- radio frequency WPs.
  • SENS as exemplified.
  • W-SENS could typically include methods for communication in W-SENS approaches functions and means at stations containing of where one or more WPs supporting very at least a switch function with a certain higher capacity transfer and other WPs capacity, at least one WP and optionally one adjusted for less capacity transfer or not used UP and /TP or more for traffic connections, if at all, at least as long as the corresponding required (if not repeating only). high capacity WP link(s) is performing well.
  • W-SENS switching is applied based on packet Means are included to handle traffic situations switching including IP fast switching/routing in such a way as an eventual degradation capability or ATM switching.
  • packet or IP could be virtually as invisible as possible to switching as an example include at least 10 connected users in time period when as an Mbit/s Ethernet or 100 Mbit/s Fast Ethernet example another link degrades severely. I.e. and/or higher speed ports (like Gigabit means to back up connections via alternative Ethernet and gradually other standards when WPs and/or via other routes (routes) is they occur) etc. would be closely associated applicable. As an example radio with corresponding WP connections applied. communication WPs that at least are including Thus, the switch function selected should at functions to be adjusted to various selectable least have the capacity to support these types transfer rates is applicable at selective time of port capacities and the ability to arrange fast being transferring higher rates if another switching between these multiple ports. alternative route is degraded.
  • a further example between two data that shall be possible to transfer without stations is a laser connection, which typically ARQs, re-transmission etc. and/or apply work well in short ranges, with clear sky etc. bandwidth reservations and detect such over few km.
  • the communication process between pair of WPs radio connection include means to adjust the are to secure that enough bandwidth or transmission capacity (bandwidth, modulation, transfer rate for actual real time transmission coding) to meet higher speed transmission requirements is applied.
  • I e methods functions and means are included If the actual capacity for at least for the to assure that the less critical data than real seamless transparent flow of data is set to be time data could use the remaining capacity set enough and the extra capacity above this is set available as extra capacity besides the between the WPs selectively in either direction capacity that is required for continuous be used for remain interactive traffic as transparent flow of bits of data Methods described earlier Methods functions and functions and means are available to select an means for setting of transfer capacity via appropriate average transfer rate based on an network management functions and/or accepted delay, possible rate to use, etc , for possible automatic regulation of transfer interactive data transfers for either direction capacity for the different types of real time and between each pair of WPs That includes interactive transfer is applicable at the methods functions and means to store data respective involved WPs under highly interactive periods when large The method of varying the transfer rate and chunks of data have to be transmitted and means for it if applied in to a system is further when the actual selected transfer rate for such is described in this document, see also figures data through any pair of WPs for the interactive 8, 14, 13, 11
  • W-SENS would be able to offer high transfer requirement through each pair of WPs capacity to many users in an area in comparison to the capacities from earlier use of it to include methods for re-arrange the wireless solutions.
  • communications services offered to multiple means are included which allows taking locations are far beyond earlier wireless advantage of a new topology situation by resolutions.
  • radio arranging routes and adopting transfer and laser communications the capacities on capacity, power level etc. in accordance.
  • This multiple ports may allow the use of ports added functional means include a topology utilising the full transparent port capacity design and set up network tool involve between different stations.
  • the exemplified capacity of 10-16 Gbit/s includes, capacity design tools, re-routing, map switch capacity seems of course high (it may and topology guidelines. be higher or less capacity) for wireless As stations principally could be arranged to purposes communications application today, in communicate in any direction or elevation with relation to the capacities that is available on other stations via applied WPs, antenna existing solutions. However, the meaning with systems or laser beams etc.
  • the functional example is to show that W-SENS is applicable means include mechanisms of re-design where to such high capacity meaning it could be used any new station that occurs in an implemented as a powerful communication alternative for already available network based on the new local and regional infrastructures. method (and a realised system W-SENS).
  • Radio based WPs include methods functions Functional means are included in a way that and means to control: various frequency such changes are possible to take advantage bandwidth controls by selection of number of of by change transmission directions of station allowed sub-channels, various total transfer, WPs to change from one station and its WP to selections of modulation level per carrier (see another station and its WP by changing also fig 8), transmitted power regulation, based antenna directions or controlling electronically on distance quality requirements, etc. transmission in new directions.
  • Methods functions and means for spatial Re-routing is includes functional means direction control, area coverage, routing allowing control of transmission directions in arrangement and/or re-arrangement.
  • Various types of directable spatial than capacity of a continuos flow of a carrier or antenna and/or laser beams are allowed to be sub-carriers is applicable by the possible included.
  • UP User ports, (UP) are exemplified in fig. 1 , 2, 3, applicable. Included are methods functions and 12, 17 a b and the numbers 100, 101 , 102 etc. means to control any of multiple horns Termination to other networks is mentioned arranged via reflected common sub-reflector to Terminal Ports, (TP), see fig 1 1000, 1021) create multiple directional antennas to be Communication between UPs, TP and UPs via connected to one or more WPs. multiple stations over a landscape, etc. is Included are also methods functions and principally interconnected via one or a multiple means using arrays of multiple horns and set of radio ports (WPs) connected.
  • WPs radio ports
  • Meand for selecting the appropriate horn for a managing W-SENS approaches is visualised corresponding direction of another WP. via Network Management Ports (NMPs) Included are also functional means using applicable to stations.
  • a pair or multiple WPs pairs are applicable d to 27). be equipped at stations. Any station includes means for communication with any other The possible control of selection of alternative station provided they optically see each other. directions by possible selection between As the number of stations and routes increase different pair of WPs means that systems increased the possible routes and transfer implement on the methods offer seamless capacity between stations is potentially similar services but at much higher possible increased etc. As an example if a new situation transfer rate etc. in comparison to traditional occur it could be of a great advantage to make wireless access. I.e.
  • Radio and radio channel capacity is ports are freely defined at any station not necessarily shared (among many stations and reduced in capacity) Further is advanced This is different in comparison to standard switching and/or routing possible and network wireless access system (in particular P-MP integration to other "backbone" network at any topologies) where terminal stations are not point The station could work as a backbone allowed to talk to each other This is because for an integrated access solution, see example they lack switching capability and the figure 24 where one WP is establishing a P-MP configuration itself Further example is a MP communication with other WPs at different access solutions including the use of dynamic stations time sharing (TDMA) and space sharing
  • TDMA dynamic stations time sharing
  • TSR 34 The method of using multiple point - point mechanisms (SDMA), TSR 34 Its terminal communications between ports (via the air) and/or repeating stations required to take the and switch between them leads to a total clock from a master clock station above station capacity, which would be much higher resulting in a hierarchy unable data transfer than in conventional access approaches between such repeaters, examples from Additionally every switch functions added in a system like TSR 34 This is because the given area adds both the switching capacity in central needs to synchronise the underlying W-SENS it also potentially improve possible the terminals and control when the respective capacity transfer capacity terminal shall communicate to the central (i e which time slots) so that the central station can
  • SDMA point - point mechanisms
  • Method functions means included at stations to various resource sharing schemes used by work as a backbone switch function for any wireless access solution and its standards user connected anywhere in a topology It It includes possible adoptions on stations to includes ability to connect other wireless available standards or evolving standards etc access systems central and/or base station to by European and/or US and/or Japanese one of the stations switch functions and uses standards any other institute Like ETSI/TM 4 such access systems remote stations as (BRAN, HA, HL) or IEEE etc Virtual realisation transparent extensions to scattered locations of multiple functions of these standards are which traffic is switched within a selected W- considered applicable and being potentially SENS station, see also figure 4 possible to operate in parallel to W-SENS method and its methods functions and means
  • Method system and means are included for the carriers imply a higher interest in adopting the possible use of directional and/or sector and/or transfer capacity to actual requirement which omni directional antenna systems and/or laser often may be less than a full and constant beams.
  • Using laser Including capability to control more than one beams on short hops and connecting such antenna beam to be steered and/or selected WPs with full transparent capacity could be simultaneously each beam in its specific considered more applicable. direction.
  • Radio communication via radio links are multiple WP operating in P-P mode and/or beginning to reach 400-600 Mbit/s WPs operating in P-MP modes.
  • functions and means are applicable to W- One of the problems for high transfer rate SENS solutions.
  • Method function and means radios is to utilise spectrum effectively thus to design and set up functions of WP is needing to use complex modulation methods included.
  • the set up of respective WPs which would be require several error function, its associated ports, its antenna correction, equalisation coursed by delay arrangements, method of communication spread, etc.
  • Method functions and means are capacity etc, etc. is included and being included to overcome to problem of individual accessible via network management functions bandwidth selection, transfer capacity, transfer virtually from any station.
  • the method function and means includes complex equalisation and/or the constant us of besides a separate design of WPs working as a complex modulation method etc.
  • WP design includes a are included ability to use one and/or more possible virtual function to be set to emulate a carriers each modulated separately and central and/or terminal function based on setcarrying its oven data. up functions via network management or Method function and means are included to similar. assign a selected number of sub-channels
  • a narrower radio channel has the advantage of arranging communication between WPs having each less noise in its respective transparently to specific service requirement, channel than a corresponding wider channel. i.e. including transfer rate, delay, bit error rate This is usable in either longer hops or correspondingly more complex modulation Communication between stations through the methods, which would increasing the potential air routed via the built in switch/switches by transfer rate (on the same bit error rate quality) switching data between pair of ports (WPs) up per channel on the same hop lengths to full capacity or with reduced capacity based
  • Methods functions and means are included to on needs, possibilities etc Communication select sub-channels to be used, balance between WPs include possible adjustments of factors of quality and modulation level, select transmit capacity, requirement, frequency, appropriate transfer rates on sub-channels, frequency bandwidth, distances, directional select error correction etc antenna beams or laser beam for each pair of WPs if applied to being able to achieve spatial
  • the method results in possibilities to gradually division expand transfer capacity between WPs in fact up to the maximum capacity of the ports used to connect the WPs from the switching
  • a method functions means including function A today seemingly high capacity possibilities to assign communication between transfer requirement of 1000 Mbit/s capacity UP, TPs and principally transparently assign between Gigabit Ethernet could be applicable transfer between pair of WPs through two or via radio by the use of this method more station in order to flow digital data for Gradual expansion of transfer rates would be principally any requirements as long it conform applicable even if the transfer between any two to bandwidth availability and required quality
  • WPs that have the ability to transparently includes functions for repeat, drop, insert, communication via 1000 Mbit/s ports is not terminate (to other backbone network) and reached I e communication performance is switch traffic at any station in an all to all defined by the channel bandwidth, number of configurations channels applied, modulation method, coding (like CRC - FEC or similar), distance, RF power, environment, frequency band etc Stations are included with method function and Summary method, sub-methods
  • the combination of transparent synchronous and/or asynchronous powerful switching capability tailored selection transfer through each pair of WPs including of WP for wireless communication between ability to handle traffic entering from various station leads to surprising results in routes comparison to previous wired and/or wireless solution for servicing multiple users in a local end/or regional environment In fact it leads to Method
  • any Method function and means at least for radio type of network topology used or superseding transmission between pair of WPs in these, any type of function, including all to all communication
  • any type of function including all to all communication
  • Including functions to assign station typology, etc digital transmission capacity in either direction at selective transfer rates principally up to the full capacity of each pair of ports assigned to connect the respective switch function at each side via the air Means to assign transfer Method functions and means are included capacity includes optimise of quality transparent communication capacity between requirement in relation to bandwidth and WPs by using the full capacity of switch to transfer rates WPs and between WPs equipped without
  • Control of all or any of following functions are means to regulate transfer speed at WPs for included radio transmitter power level control, traffic between any two switching function modulation type or modulation level control, including at last WPs for laser communication level of fault error correction, antenna gain, antenna direction, frequency bandwidth by 10 selection of number of sub carriers, antenna Method function and means including control polarisation control Dual polarisation i e cross of transmission capacity by the use of polarisation transfer adoptions when applied modulation level control, selection of bandwidth by selecting required number of sub-carriers (FDM)
  • Method functions and means to combine efficient, gradual increased transfer capacity in various routing alternatives Including denser topologies, decrease the average hop combined use of route based on different distance by reduce transmitted power or electromagnetic frequencies as carriers increase the modulation level and the possible including use of various transfer capacity per speed I e includes mechanisms to change route and/or WPs taking part in transmission, any established pair WP in network which including laser combined radio, including "high" changes with new stations added or deleted speed communication and parallel or including the ability to set up of new pair of redundant lower speed route connections and/or change speed performance or change routing in accordance 12
  • Method functions and means are in such cases
  • Method functions and means including the WP include settings via network possibility to assign WPs at stations where any management control function terminal such WP have the capability as a central (example 200, 210) function establishing radio communication with more than one other WP(s) These WPs being 16 based at variable locations all radio optically Method and means including assignment of reachable from such central WP
  • the transfer capacity based on the detected communication transmission capacity includes requirement for transparent communication, being at least based on frequency division versus burst data communication This include where the communication transmission ability to detect transparent transmit resource of a central WP is shareable with requirement at respective WPs, detection of multiple other WPs in order to satisfy the real time protocols based on IP, detecting of respective communications capacity demand priority level on IP protocol and/or any other between the respective scattered WPs and a bandwidth reservation scheme on IP or WP To achieve selective transmission signalled by cells by ATM switches if these are capacity it includes possible selective portion used of any or selective parts of the following Including ability to assign bandwidth at potentially functionality's, frequency appropriate quality for possible transfer of
  • Method functions and means including that with about one or a few microseconds (this is switching function at any station is usable as considered fast and adding little extra delay as backbone switch Including the possibility to be 1 us corresponding to about 300 m used as a backbone switch for any external propagation time in air) wireless system and/or internal virtually I e seamless transparent flow could be created wireless access solution, see figure 4 obtained through such station with limited extra (a,b) or figure 20 delays added per station As an example one ms or more could be considered long in some
  • Method functions and means include capability propagation) if multiple switches were involved to shift between carrier frequencies of any of in a connection Telecommunications type of the multiples or multiple sub-carriers carriers services in particular is sensitive seamless real used for communications between pairs of time performance requirements but also WPs traditional data communication throughput
  • Directed antennas re-directed antennas, the network. Effects of small time delay multiple directed antennas. variations between different connections depending of the number of station passed etc.
  • Method functions and means including ability Method functions and means including system at any place, any station, from any station which switch functions at station include to the establish virtually any type of wireless network capacity to handle the sum or the capacity of including one or multiples of network the a number of ports WPs, UPs, TPs, OPs of topologies or combinations if principally optical various rates (fig. 16, 17, 18 100, 100', 110, line of site occurs. Earlier wireless access of 210, 210' etc.), of each station. The number of station topology structures is superseded. WPs shall be possible to expand at each station in order to allow a gradual increasing
  • Method functions and means including ability capacities etc. with other stations. to measure quality of data transferred between WPs, including measure of loss of data, 25 overflow on specific links (memories) of WPs
  • Method functions and means including at least and report such data. one switch function per station, which digitally
  • Method functions and means including ability in fig. 31. to let data be transferred between any WPs at any station through a used connectionless 26 switching functions fast and transparent Method functions and means to include through such station with time delay which possibility to geographically scatter the stations could be considered neglected.
  • Including if randomly include typically narrow beam transferee goes through multiple's of stations antennas pointing to respective required WPs each with similar addition delay coursed by in order to arrange communication.
  • Including the possibility to connect a number of overlapping frequencies are avoided in the connections possible and reach multiple same transmission directions among location and in this way create a multi stations. connection network for many scattered users to select different frequencies to avoid at alternative points and directions.
  • Figure 1 a and b up gradually from a user to a user and to Station topologies in vertical, horizontal space access users around the corners.
  • means for terminating traffic to new point As an example to a fibre backbone) is applicable
  • ⁇ adjustable to various levels of errors and for a wireless port are shown, inclusive an types of errors depending on error example of splitting of modem capacity and performance detected, grouping sub-carriers via filter banks.
  • AGC automatic gain control
  • Figure 10 a,b Show an example of a possible emulation of a
  • stations wireless access system originated from a vision of type of physical implementation wireless port and its use of the W-SENS structure of stations. switching capacity and/or external switching.
  • Examples of some possible serial to parallel are generally vision possible adoptions to conversion of incoming data to a wireless port various co-existence, interoperability to a parallel application when more than one standards, etc. in combination with various carrier is used. proprietary air interfaces etc.
  • Figure 14 parallel and/or as a backup.
  • Example of incoming traffic to a station via the air from two different stations which are both Figure 24 added and transferred via a common wireless Shows an example of an implementation port to a forth station. where W-SENS is combined wit a fibre backbone, termination is shown to be able at
  • FIG. 15 various location, external switching platforms
  • An example shows routing alternatives in a W- are shown reachable via the fibre network.
  • SENS solution including use of laser and radio in combination.
  • stations using power distribution and/or switching on intermediate frequency or radio frequency level for a point - multipoint applications are shown.
  • Figure 1a Shows one additional example of a wireless port structure.
  • Figure 1a regional areas A view of a possible
  • the general idea with this figure is to show an implementation of the method into a system is example of an implementation of the method in generally shown
  • the stations are viewed from a system where communication between above
  • the stations are normally fixed located stations are passed via ports either physical placed on earth in a mast, on a house, on a local ports connected to wires/fibre or though wall, indoor and/or outdoor, it could in some ports specifically designed to carry information applications be considered placed in a between station through the air
  • At each station balloon, aircraft, satellite, terrestrial movable is at least one switching function taking care of units, lap - top communication etc
  • the selection of switching and/or routing WPs could be considered allowing potentially a information between ports mixture
  • It further illustrates a wireless communication network consisting of two or more stations Systems implemented based on the method based on the method
  • the idea with the have means for control and/or supervision drawing is to generally vision that any station This is applicable at any station generally can communicate or distribute or receive visualised on stations as 200 as exemplified at information between
  • Termination Ports, TP to other area Means to utilise such added capacity is networks can be applied at selected stations applicable by re-design or routing, increase and ports transfer speeds, etc allowing higher transfers
  • the method and the inserted or dropped via UPs or at TPs (1000) implementation include means to offer and combinations of UP, TP 1020 Stations are switched services for connected users locally equipped with switching function that include at each station, between different station means for local switching between ports at and/or between users and external networks stations (100, 101 ) and means for switching This directly from the wireless network solution data between any of the ports UP, TP, WP at and in addition similar switching services any station
  • insert and drop of digital offered by other switching devises is applicable information and/or repeat and/or termination of i e switching function includes means of information are applicable at any station serving external wireless network, wired
  • the idea with the example in the figure is to connections etc define the method applicable specifically ideal for wireless terrestrial networks in local and or Figure 1 b
  • the vision with this figure is to show an hop lengths are generally shorted (less example of where stations in figure 1 a) transmitted power required at maintained differently located in latitude and longitude also capacity and quality) and more alternative may be different located in high
  • the meaning with the figure 1 b) (and 1 a) is 110, 111 etc
  • the interface 110/600 shown also to illustrate that the increase of number of at station 10 may be a standard user port or stations in a limited results in increased routing close to similarities in order to make it possible possibilities as all stations principally can be to remotely locate 500 and or 550 via a designed to communicate with each other, standard cabling If the switching functions 2 provided line of site occur etc It also shows contain an IP switch and/or including routing that if station 10 and 13 which could be capabilities for standards ports of today like considered to be established first A new 10, 100 and/or 1000 Mbit s and/or other station 11 could be reached either via 11 or 13 standards and/or other future Ethernet If another station 14 is installed there will be standards Cabling could be used to connect various routing possibilities to/from 14 via 10, one or more WPs at each station distant from 11 , 13 or combinations of them This shows 2, 10 that the routing alternatives are increasing, the In the case of using radio frequency bands are mode seen from station 10 Other types of the WP at respective side
  • Individual pairs of WPs include communication an FDMA approaches including means for means including frequency select, modulation, control of selectable number of sub-carriers level, error correction level etc that is per remote WP for multiple transparent selectable specifically for each pair of ports connections between station similar to as if Multiple WPs at each station can of course be point - point mode operation were used, but identically designed as well or mixture of typically for less capacity various types and standards
  • Means to apply TDMA scheme on carriers is Functions include traffic drop and/or repeating applicable TDMA would have the at any station An example in the figure show disadvantage of a frame structure coursing information that is coming in via the air at additional delays per hop In addition station 11 from station 10 being switched to synchronisation and timing would be needed port 112/600 via 1 1/2 for traffic that shall be between effected WPs Means to combine repeated to another station or to port 101 for TDMA as a combination to FDMA is applicable traffic that shall be dropped by the possibility to time frame per carrier Thus, a finer capacity selection would be
  • switch 2 in the example is a applicable than FDMA only which could be connectionless switching routing function it is typical applicable in optional virtually access considered to include means for fast switching solution
  • Both FDMA, CDMA could course performance
  • the time delay to pass through fewer problems with delay and synchronisation each stations switching function from port 110 than TDMA to 112 (and vice versa) is done at a neglected
  • the available time delay from the users application capacity of a WP would be shared and hence perspective
  • seamless flows could be arranged reduced in comparison for stations connected via multiple repeating steps
  • it would make it relative free selection of routes i e many applicable to use for access and for directions at each station and no hierarchical interconnections between stations with low structure as for radio access solutions
  • bandwidth requirements This is an illustration Means to select multiple routs are applicable to of differences between W-SENS structure and set-up in practice an all to all station its many advantages in comparison to communication arrangements which is to be traditional wireless access In fact W-SENS used in
  • the figure is suppose to generally show the expanded Every new station in an area have a means to use alternative WPs indicated by capability to connect more station and each 551
  • This particular WPs transmission means station can be expanded with a number of 551 is arranged in such a way that multiple WPs
  • Each pair of WP having a certain transfer WPs at other stations 11 , 12, etc can capacity which could correspond to TP/UP communicate through it I e means not only for ports used or be less which could be typical for single pair of configurations as illustrated by radio, 550
  • the number of ports and the capacity of each 551 , at station 10 is arranged to exchange of these ports may be based on standard rates information between multiple WPs in a P-MP used for connectionless switching as an example 100 Mbit/s duplex or semi-duplex WPs at other stations, means are also included ports, semi-duplex 10 Mbit/s ports or duplex to allow external wireless access systems 1000 Mbit/s ports working as illustrated in figure 3 Principally
  • any external wireless access system based on switching function having a capacity of any standard or evolving standard like 802 11 , assigning up to around 30 ports for 100 Mbit/s 802 16 or Hiperaccess, or Hiperlan or ETSI (Fast Ethernet duplex) and 2-8 for 1000 Mbit/s TM4 co-existence standards, TSR 34 etc ) is at each station It would in this case result in a applicable to being connected via appropriate station with a total switching capacity function user ports (100, 101 , 120 etc )
  • the interface of around 8-16 Gbit/s Multiplied at many towards W-SENS is in such case applicable on locations this would represent an enormous appropriate interfaces physical and/or logical total switching capacity in the specific area
  • standard Means to include use of internal a situation visualised above extreme air switching function (2) and/or external switching transfer capacities would be possible to (2') functions at any location is applicable for handle I e means to handle large volumes of connected external wireless access systems switched or routed data inside a W-SENS solution
  • This control supervision function is using resource sharing of one WP with other schematically shown connectable for stations, 200, for direct connection to processing possibilities to transfer signal information to the function, 210 these are via a terminal function, corresponding end (ends) to define any and/or a PC etc included with appropriate selected synchronous form of the synchronous application programs for the set-up and/or signal that is taken or (derived) at the ends control and/or supervision Means for control
  • This includes possible reshape of both data and supervision of any WP is applicable at any and signalling information should it be needed
  • WP Means to physically reach any WP is I e as one example only, an applied ITU-T included as indicated by 210 shown signal E3 at one end is spiced in a number of schematically at station 12
  • I e functions ITU-T E1 signals including appropriate including means for set up the wireless signalling at a corresponding end network ports to appropriate speed, power Further included are conversions of signals level, bandwidth, antenna
  • connectionless switching function visualised by 2
  • Means to convert data that have been conversion between Ethernet type of transferred over W-SENS dropped here synchronous types of ports typically used in visualised schematically at station 11 , 102 I e the telecommunication area (E1/T1 , E2/T2, the functional unit 120 include conversion of a E3./T3, SDM-1 , SDH, SONET, ATM, etc ) serial asynchronous stream 102 to a applicable Means indicated as generally synchronous stream (or multiple synchronous visualised at station 11 include conversion streams if splicing is required) in shown including at least rates of those between at functional unit 120 least Fast Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet ports Typical synchronous traffic flows used in the Means are included to achieve a synchronous telecommunications area which are supposed drop of data 121 irrespective of the to be transmitted and/or dropped over W- asynchronous transfer inclusive the possibility SENS stations are schematically visualised of various routing alternatives through the entering at 121 at the functional unit 120 and network has been used or not and
  • I e means to detect bandwidth requirement on similar stations as b to be virtually connected applied signals is applied and means to assign under one or more external switches/routers appropriate transfer capacity though W-SENS 1001 , as generally visualised via a connection stations is applied Means to manually (via shown as a dotted line between b and 1001 network management system etc ) and/or This dotted line represents virtually a automatically assign appropriate transfer synchronous including ATM based and/or an capacity for selective signal to be transferred asynchronous depending of the type of based on changes detected in the assigned external switch etc and application In the protocols of applied signals including detection example for a wireless access solution and of over flow in buffer memories if transfer connect ⁇ on(s) to its switch function (which was capacity is not enough external the W-SENS in this example), but it
  • Method functions and means are included as a could be for any application
  • the more external switch and or router functions method includes similar function for related to the service the mobile network offer applications based on LAN, Fast Ethernet, Means to apply other wireless access networks Gigabit Ethernet etc I e asynchronous data at selected stations in W-SENS structures ports, which is directly applied to a station, as based on evolving ETSI BRAN standards like exemplified at station 11 , 101
  • the required the various Hiperaccess, Hiperlan standards transfer of data that is exemplified by voice IP, and corresponding US and Japanese video IP, video conferencing etc By detecting standards are included Other standards like the sum of such transfers a required transfer bluetooth
  • Means are included to assign external wireless W-SENS structure should such application be systems in order to extend W-SENS In the required
  • an external a central station a shown applied to station 12 via port 105 which Figure 5 traffic flow is controlled by the switching
  • One example of many possible physical function 3/2 of station 12 The dotted parallel implementation structures of a station, which is lice between switch functions 3/2 symbolise based on the method, is shown in the figure signalling protocols
  • the W-SENS system The basic idea is to show some various is in this case offering a backbone switching functions and means to realise WPs It is only facility (2/3) and the external access system the intention to generally indicate possible offer extensions "as transparent as possible" to ways of implementing few variable types of connected users under the switching function WPs, some splicing options of modem 2/3 of 12 Means are included to use multiples capacity, various antenna arrangements etc of similar access systems at selected stations applicable in systems based on the methods in W
  • Another case shown by b is another wireless arrange various bandwidth and/or transfer access system connected to port 101 at station capacities for the transmit transaction direction 12
  • the port 101 at 12 and port 105 at station is included I e including balanced and/or 10 is virtually offering a transparent connection unbalanced communication between any WPs between the external backbone switch 1001
  • the actual design of each WP is possible to be and the wireless access system b
  • the electromagnetic ⁇ measured the load on memory to get an carriers are at least the following means opinion of to low or to high transfer rate is schematically included applied between WPs
  • ⁇ one modulator (552)
  • the processing function unit visualised by 566/1 may be located elsewhere or taken care
  • processing unit or units for the switching are at least included of by processing unit or units for the switching
  • ⁇ means for converting data on port 110 funct ⁇ on(s) indicated by 9 before it is transmitted over the air
  • the processing functions un ⁇ t(s) is considered
  • ⁇ means to convert data received from air to containing control programs for setting up and port 100 controlling and/or supervision of transmission between WPs
  • ⁇ for application of error detection and/or generally visualised by 210 for WP or an error correction codes to data which is optional similar port 200 for a station going to be transmitted over the air
  • ⁇ for detection of bit error performance Separation in sub-WPs of one WP is applied and/or including correction of data allowing a basic WP modem capacity, based received from a corresponding WP on more tan one sub-carrier, to be spliced transferred over air via WPs including the possible use in different
  • This includes means for separation of WPs least an antenna system is included (some from radio/antenna parts on one hand and possible exemplified by 582, 583 and 581) and modem, logic's etc and/or switching and UPs at least a duplex filter arrangement 569 when some distance away via low loss, low cost frequency duplex is applied cabling
  • An antenna system is included (some from radio/antenna parts on one hand and possible exemplified by 582, 583 and 581) and modem, logic's etc and/or switching and UPs at least a duplex filter arrangement 569 when some distance away via low loss, low cost frequency duplex is applied cabling
  • Means to intermediate store data (visualised size of radio heads is applied by locating these by 551 M and/or 551 MUP) under periods when as near as possible to horn and/or applied the data transfer requirement is higher than the directly to a horn etc allocated transfer rate though to a
  • This method includes the use of antenna corresponding WP (generally exemplified by 581 or 583 or
  • Means are included to control the average similar) capacity requirement for burst data by Means to allow location of a number of small including control of the load of an intermediate radio transmitter/receivers on an antenna digital memory function system is exemplifies by (581)
  • This antenna Means are included to exemplified shows supports of multiple parallel
  • Means to allocate any radio head to an number channels, sub-carriers in each direction of directions is included in order to make it (down and/or uplink) possible to select direction per WP, sub-WP ⁇ FDM/FDMA, i e common share of etc for continuos streams in point to point bandwidth sub-carriers etc by a group of mode of operations between WPs and/or sbb- WPs in down link direction (to multiple WPs WPs) and selective use of separate
  • Transfer of data via the air between multiple frequencies on reverse up- nk direction WPs is applicable This includes « FDM/TDMA, i e as above in down-link communication between one WP (sub-WP) direction and TDMA on common frequency and a number of other WPs (sub-WPs) in a band in the up-hnk direction, see below point - multipoint mode, P-MP
  • This include ⁇ TDMA TDMA, i e share of a bandwidth means of selecting a number of sub-carriers and using time frame structure including and/or sub-channels (see generally figure 8 a) means to allocate time slots within frames between respective pair of WPs for their to select individual transfer capacity respective transfer between each other between WPs (sub-WPs) either in down and/or up-hnk direction
  • Multiple carriers are also applicable to be ⁇ TDM/TDMA, i e time division separation possible to be used in common by multiple done logically on information transferred scattered WPs (sub-WPs) form a WP to multiple WPs and TDMA in Means to use the same and/or overlapping the up- nk direction frequency bandwidth of one WP (sub-WP) communications resources at a station to be Means are included to utilise spread spectrum used by multiple other WPs (sub-WPs) at other transmission utilising coding and/or frequency stations (at least in the direction toward the hopping for WPs arranged for point - point scattered WPs) is applied mode and or WPs arranged for P-MP mode
  • Multiple users which transfer data between WPs (sub-WPs) on overlapping frequency Means to apply spatial division for the WPs bands (carrier, sub-carriers), include means to arranged in P-MP mode of operation i e logically separate such traffic between the SDMA (spatial) are included
  • Means to separate multiple users traffic via WPs operating on overlapping frequencies is Method in W-SENS approaches include to separate users in segment on carriers, sub- effective adoption to station topology changes carriers Example of one of many possible allowing new routing possibilities when new segmentation structures per carrier is shown in stations occurs in a network Means for figure 19 Means to signal between WPs who structuring and/or restructuring of networks are and when which segment whom uses for the included Means to allow the possibility to vary transfer of data between WPs transfer and/or add transfer directions in unpredictable directions are included for point-
  • Sharing of communication resources between point mode of operations as well as point- users in the opposite direction from multiple multipoint mode of operations between WPs WPs to one WP is not applicable on overlapping frequency due to interference
  • the functionality CDMA, etc and/or frequency division is to prevent the need to (always) install separation of sub-carriers are applied FDMA physically new antennas (like 582, for every new added direction. I.e. by the time of ⁇ selective transfer speed selection versus installation of a new station an antenna which hop length have a capability to add new main lobes into ⁇ corresponding error correction adjustment another added directions (including etc.
  • the illustrated antenna 581 shows one such Common use of equipment are arranged at antenna with a capability to arrange WP and/or station to reduce cost and improve a flexible sub-WPs in multiple antenna lobe directions. and modular variation and expanding of It also visualises a possible spatial separation transfer capacity communication in multiple between communication of pairs of WPs in directions etc.
  • point-point mode and/or point - multipoint Means of sharing equipment include: modes. ⁇ sharing of station facilities by allowing the
  • Arranging WP in pairs of Point-Point (P-P), applying of a number of WPs working in communication means that a radio head multiple point - point mode with other (transmitter/receiver and filter, 568, 569) is scattered station used per lobe. ⁇ sharing of stations and at least one WP
  • WPs in a Point - Multipoint including the use common use of spliced mode of operation according to FDMA, into sub-WPs by more than one station, FDM/FDMA, FDM TDMA, TDMA TDMA etc.
  • WP and/or sub-WP Spatial separation i.e. Space Division Multiple « sharing of a station and at least one WP Access (SDMA) is applicable. and/or sub-WP to be shared by more than one WP and/or sub-WP
  • Switching and/or routing of traffic between solution similar to 583 with continuos coverage stations in selected directions is for is applied i.e. included at least for transmission and/or reception of data from FDMA/FDMA, FDM/FDMA, FDMA/TDMA, user applications (like 1010/1020) and/or TDM/TDMA, TDM/CDMA. including communication with other stations (like 300, 301..) in different
  • Means to regulate transmitted power is applied direction by digital switched/routing including ability to make changes based on function applied at station various of hop length and / or transmission, ⁇ Establishment of communication from one fading margin, bit error performance, etc. for station equipped with one WP that allow each specific lobe direction and pair of WPs communication with multiple scattered (sub-WPs) in communication. stations, these station as well equipped at least with one WP where the
  • the means to arrange for a spliced approach communication from one WP to the other (sub WP) mentioned here is to make it WPs is including transfer via spatial possible to better utilise the total capacity antenna beams according to variable demands. I.e. it also ⁇
  • a group of sub-WPs may commonly share a sub-capacity (and physical bandwidth)
  • Means and advantages with the each sub- of the total potentially available by a central WP approach includes: WP.
  • Each sub-WP includes means to
  • ⁇ customised physical bandwidth specifically select its bandwidth i.e. number of
  • Respective WP and/or sub-WP (the central to and from a station Such controlling means or the remotes) to tailor for there is visualised by a functioning processing unit, respective transfer requirement and adopt 9
  • One processing function unit 9 includes to variable bandwidth requirements to means for virtually emulate the processing reduce cost, functions of a WP or more (generally visualised
  • connectionless packet data is means for general examples of systems implementation storing intermediate peak burst of interactive possibilities of a type of WP data (as an example by the use of TCP/IP) Means included for communication is applicable ⁇ selection of sub-carriers to radio heads
  • Such memory ⁇ of intermediate frequency directions function includes ability to be arranged as an switching (ISW, fig 31 b) external memory 551 M, which is including possibility to tailor in memory size, is This includes possibility to separate any WP to schematically indicated work into more than one direction etc as The methods functions and means included at described above for separate bandwidth (no of functional processing unit 566/1 are sub-channels speeds etc ) of respective radio
  • Control apply of appropriate transfer rate generally indicating functional means for per carrier combining 4 sub-channels on an intermediate
  • the dotted square of 566/1/1 means to channels grouped and the capacity in transmit represents the actual processes controlled for respective receive direction a number of WPs
  • 551 MUP Similar functionality's as described for 551 M is Further means to control the capacity including considered for digital ports 100, 110 etc physical bandwidth per sub-channel is applied visualised by 551 MUP In addition these may The selection of different modulation levels as well work in co-ordination with each other if applicable including QPSK, 16QAM, 32 QAM, both are implemented 64 QAM, 128, QAM, 256 QAM, 512 QAM, 1024 QAM, 2048 QAM, 4096 QAM
  • a vision of a possible station platform is represented by 10
  • a number of WPs, Ups, is shown in the figure to be controlled by a
  • the use of standard radio frequency plans is for controlling intermediate frequencies of included
  • a typical example is a frequency sub-channels cannel plan based on 28 MHz, which may be ⁇ to switch the intermediate frequency sub- spliced in a number of combined bandwidths, carrier or groups of sub-carriers to more like 1 75, 3 5, 7, 14, 28 MHz Other may be 1 than one radio head including in selectable MHz channels, 5, 10, 20, 40 50, 100 time depending on circumstances like applications, ⁇ for distributing any sub-channel or groups standards and countries Arrangement of sub- of sub-channels to more than one radio carriers bandwidth and total bandwidth head considered usable varies according to application etc Means are included to make Means for internal control of any WP is the carrier and/or sub-carrier bandwidth available to a degree needed for functions grouping feasible to be organised in a bunch of envisaged This includes signalling visualised effectively grouped
  • ⁇ include selectively possible vary of includes typically interaction between a modulation level processing unit here represented by 566/1 and
  • Method functions means include sub-channels In order to slime an simplify the size, share to be possible to control for functions to increase security etc of specific
  • the WPs include means to locally and/or
  • Groups of carriers controlled to selectable Control of flows and performance include modulation levels i e control of group by possible transparent use of either sides group (example - a group of OFDM processing units function i e including remote modems each containing a number of sub- overtake of one WP at one sire of another WP carriers over a certain band - one example Including functions for set-up and/or control is a number of OFDM modems similar to and/or supervision function and selected those used by an evolving ETSI Hiperlan remote real time communication controls and standard) supervision mechanisms by a remote WP process function
  • Control of carriers in frequencies is required to select appropriate radio channel, arrange A result of this is any of two WP in frequency hoping schemes etc
  • communication could take over control of the it advantageous to allow separation of WPs other to increase security and flexibility at time between radio and antennas, in addition to be of set up etc
  • This includes the ability to control able to switch directions based on intermediate a set up situation logically from any one end as switching, to distribute intermediate an example frequencies to multiple radio heads for TDM
  • Tools are available to support installation, setand or TDM type of applications up, basic configuration, re-arrange Method functions and means are included communication between stations, WPs etc Methods functions and Means are included to with a selected transfer quality balanced on set up communication between any two WPs actual traffic requirement for such transfer are included
  • This means include set up of between any pair of station stations connected required signalling between any two ports to perform communication effectively
  • Point-point mode of operation or FDMA type P- described processing function units 566/1 are MP mode of operation are continuos streams exchanging signalling data between
  • control data for the remote WP is detected applicable for various other possible features and this control data include information It is applied to simplify frequency shift (under speed select, signalling time segment), speed changes,
  • Means for controlling transfer rate settings and transferred analysed, quality optimisation is included it is controllable ⁇ control of one or more sub-channels via an network management function ⁇ signalling data with the corresponding WP visualised by 210 for any WP (at least those is mixed in and extracted equipped with a processing unit 566/1) and 200 for any station
  • ⁇ signalling data with the corresponding WP visualised by 210 for any WP (at least those is mixed in and extracted equipped with a processing unit 566/1) and 200 for any station
  • Means for remote control supervision of any signals and I sent and/or received between the station and WP from any station is applied by digital functional unit 566 and the modem the functionality of network management functional unit 551/567 functions
  • FIG. 7a Means are included for manual and/or Figure 7a automatically selection of transfer
  • the figure shows example of implementation requirements between pairs of WPs, including of the method functions means in a system or optimisation of a total transfer rate balanced part of a system
  • two WPs 550 shown to communicate.
  • Communication is and/or Gigabit Ethernet and/or any future considered in this case to happen radio evolving standard of similar kind etc. optically performed schematised by 302.
  • Transfer of Asynchronous Transfer Mode Connectionless switching function anticipated signals of various rates is further exemplified as indicated by 2 at station 10 and 11. being transferred transparently should this be required.
  • connectionless packet data sub-channels are used to carry information to transfer: be transferred between pair of WPs. It is ⁇ Data to be transferred at station 10, 100t, visualised how shifts occur in number of subincludes ability to handle applications channels from time to time (BWTx and BWTy) which uses various IP protocols and BWRxx and BWRyy). (exemplified by at least the following I.e. it is illustrated methods functions means included IPv4, IPv6, rslP, nat, IPsec etc.). included to: ⁇ Support efficiently and utilise transfer
  • Means include selection of modulation level, signalling information which allow it to be number of sub-channels (thus transfer rate) switched and/or routed to interface 110t (a inclusive selection of electromagnetic radio typical serial interface), frequency carrier selectively per direction.
  • ⁇ Data entered (110t) which have to be routed to more than one WP at a station
  • the figure illustration show generally a for parallel routing etc. is capable of being selectable number of sub-channels are applied spliced it into various routes and/or for the transfer of information between the two distributed in parallel to more than one WP WPs, 550. controlled by the switching function and/or
  • Figure 7b indicate number of channels its process function 566/1. allocated for transfer from station 10 to 11 and ⁇ Data content from 110t entered at WP 550 that the number is shifted to be less at a is including ability to analyse the type of certain time. transfer required,
  • Figure 7c illustrates a few number of station Data to be transferred include ability to are allocated for transfer from station 11 to 10 filtered out at 550, initially and that the number of channels are ⁇ Data which has to be transferred as increased after time xx.
  • seamless synchronous (and/or synchronous) include analyse in 550 and
  • the user connections in the example at peaks are higher than the applied implies services multi service support for users transfer capacity to the other station being connected to a connectionless continuously supports environment like Ethermet, Fast Ethernet « Data status of such intermediate memory typical rates used by standard radio link function is detectable in order to be used approaches, problems of delay spread typical to regulate the transfer rate between the in radio communications, robust corresponding WPs at least for interactive communication, increased hop-lengths data (typical may be example TCP/IP based traffic etc )
  • the figure generally visualises use of one type
  • ⁇ Data supposed to transferred to the other of FDM modulation for communication station inclusive signalling between between WPs stations and/or WPs and/or UPs etc is In the example is a certain number of subpacked in a logical format for the channels (TC1 , TC2, TC3, TC,4 up to TCn) transaction in correspondence to a shown allocated for the traffic in on direction communications procedure via the air and another number of sub-channels (RD1 , which may be based on standards and/or RC2 up to RCp) for the communication in proprietary standards the opposite direction
  • ⁇ Data is transferred to a corresponding WP
  • the visualisation is only meant to (in the example in point-point mode) where schematically show a certain frequency it is repacked at station 11 550 to a spectrum of each sub-channel
  • the actual selected format and transmitted via 100r to frequency bandwidth of each sub-channel is switching function of station 11 where it is here shown to be about equal, however this switched to UP 1010 may differ from application to allocation
  • the use of a same frequency bandwidth apply to
  • FIG. 8b A similar process is performed for the other and other advantages type of traffic i e ATM and synchronous telecommunication signal transfers Figure 8b In this cases are their signal format converted
  • the figure shows one of many possible to the appropriate asynchronous signal format modulator structures including signalling before it is transmitted over
  • the figure visualises an example of a the system Including repackaging and modulator (MOD) which modulate a number of clocking etc at the receive side as been sub-channels and applying a filter group described principally in other places of this consisting of 8 channels TC1 TC8 to FB8T1 document
  • Another similar group is formed in parallel FB8T2 These are combed in into 16 subchannels to CC16T These are combined in an
  • the method functions and means include use connected to a radio head of more than one carrier
  • the following methods functions and means are included FDM, FDMA, TDM and or TDMA and or
  • Modulator (different transfer capacity, directions etc )
  • ⁇ Demodulator ⁇ Station include options to add various
  • TC 1 TC transferring, splitting of user data into more 4 than one WP and/or sub-WP (route) to
  • Groupings of sub-carriers (CC4, CC8 etc ) support various transfer routes to the same
  • Radio heads, filter, sub-WP virtual point - ⁇ Switching functions include UPs at various point visualised by 582 antenna stations and/or at the same stations to arrangement and/or sub-WP visualised as transfer information via WPs or not a virtual P-MP via 581 antenna ⁇ Stations are capable of emulating arrangement functions of wireless access solutions
  • Functional unit CC4 means to show how 4 Any station than can see another one and sub-channels in either in/or direction are used where these stations are equipped with a or usable However, it is exemplified that corresponding WP communication could be variable bandwidth set-up is applicable by performed indicating 4 channels out and at least 1 Synchronous, seamless synchronous flow channel in requirements, asynchronous packets and/or
  • the whole capacity of a modem may be used cell is transferable virtually transparent for one radio head (laser) or more directions or
  • the abbreviation 13/13713" (as generally other combinations, as this is only a general described in figure 17 b and 18) indicate a visualisation possible use of a mixture of stations topologies which use one and/or multiple switch and/or
  • the system implementation shown is indicating distribution, films etc ), by applying broadcast systems based on connectionless switching protocol on applied data and means to respond functions in the stations Transparent to send such data along appropriate routes for communication is principally applicable, each destination irrespective of the number of stations passed Further (B, D) indicates an establishment of a at least seen from a user perspective number of possible transparent connections between user application for asynchronous or
  • FIG. 600 The figure meaning to further visualising interrelated, i e placed on roof top, in the internal communications possibilities to support basement, in the localities of user premises access of scattered users which may or may etc not require high performance switching
  • a virtual implementation of logical depending of the total flow required at a functions of multiples of wireless accesses functional unit 600 include possibilities to be solutions to be operating at one or more located at a distance from 610 I e 600 may be stations See also further explanation in figure located outdoor and 610 indoor separated by 20 I e some applications are a use of a x-m via a wire or fibre in order to simplify wireless solution to operate a transparent installation extensions of (an interface -via wire or similar) to connect a user or a user group at a remote
  • the functional unit 610 which also switching system I e such switching system shown to contain a
  • the transaction of data demands the use of (near or in co-operation with one or a few the equipment and or frequency spectrum thus WPs) which interrelates to a common means for effective sharing of both spectrum switching function 2' at 610 and equipment is included
  • the meaning with the shown structure is to Possibilities to switch and/or route data generally visualise one of many possible between Users in a network are applicable distributed switching concept at a station
  • Each which E and a local F generally illustrates it such distributed switch function 2 at 600 could be arranged to handle a number of WPs in
  • Figure 10 a) is principally visualising one of ⁇ establish a station (or part of a station 600) many possible physical structures of a station to be built into a multi-lobe antenna and an example of a station connected to an equipped with a number of WPs etc external user network (packet data oriented - i e Ethernet, Fast Ethernet and/or Gigabit
  • An example of a possible implementation is to Ethernet and a synchronous connections etc ) locate 4 x the 600 units (or more) on 4 separate walls of a building etc all these ⁇ selection of modulation level of sub- connected to 610 located in a building at a carriers (i e which could be from BPSK, terminal room etc i e in order to establish a QPSK 256 QAM 4096 QAM), station node for a very high capacity « verify transmission quality Bit Error Rate arrangement covering various directions performance BER and/or when applicable Principal difference here between earlier delay performance in reference to required description of a typical station could be to quality replace 110 with 100 and 600 with
  • Figure 11 a and 11 b transfer data based on separation of This figure illustrates some examples of transfer streams in space and time from packing data that was entered into a WP into individual streams transferred through the some various formats to carriers and/or sub- air and/or to multiple real and/or virtual carriers for the transmission over the air WPs, i e including selective coding on the individual multiple bit streams and/or
  • This data is applied into a suitable format for a serial stream include according to schemes the transmission through the air This is done « pick of data of the data to be transferred by picking byte by byte of the received packed (q-1 , etc ) at selected positions, bit and/or and apply it to channel by channel sequentially bytes accorting to selectable scheme until the whole packet is applied, 1 to q » place data on sub-channels to a selectable Packets that follow (100/b), 1 to k, etc may be scheme, which may differ from sequential allowed to continue direct sequentially on the (as was previously described) next sub-channel, as principally shown in fig 11 b Additional extra control bytes may be Similar are methods functions and means applied for error detection error correction or applied at corresponding ends to decrypt other purposes selective methods if needed for transferred data in accordance to the schemes the specific packets 100/a and 100/b applied which is signalled and agreed between The byte by byte conversion of serial to parallel the respective WPs transfer is repeated normally unless a certain position of segmentation
  • Methods functions and mean of transfer of where transmitted towards adopted WPs the through the air include ability to apply to such serial structure of each such cell would lower layer time segmentation protocol or not similarly be applied byte by byte sequentially At position (P1 ) which would be selected to be channel by channel in a similar way as for possible to be repeatable occurring packets of variable lengths
  • ATM independent of modulation level selected i e cells would be extra protected in its content by at T01 ,T02,T03 etc
  • ⁇ utilise applied error detection codes means are included for connectionless applied on Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, Gigabit switching functions applied at stations where Ethernet data packets cells etc ⁇ the WP would be supporting transparently
  • ⁇ WPs are assigned between full bandwidth and/or noticed quality performance at the and/or no connection at all corresponding WP end using variable degree of forward error Considering integration of packet data corrections coding on selected parts of networks and telecommunication types of data data transferred (like header of ATM cells, to be transferred requiring synchronously and/or other services signalling and/or and/or seamless synchronously like IP-Voice, quality improvements required) IP-video real time visions of new on Internet
  • Methods functions and means are included in adding possible transfer capacity at such order to support the communication capacity station and/or quality between UPs, TPs depending on Additionally any new station could potentially traffic transfer requirements by be used to local switching/routing and/or used selection of physical bandwidths per pair of as backbone-switching function for externally WP connected access systems like fixed or mobile controlling of numbers of carriers and rates wireless access setting of modulation level on carriers
  • a non-hierarchical topology structure between WPs, obtainable between stations is obtainable setting of error correction which leads to flexible switching and/or routing setting of transmission power adoptions to and/or termination of traffic
  • radio links and/or radio links select polarisation arranged in ring topologies and/or any network selection of cross polarised transfer solution based on cables fibres etc known, far controllable via tools supporting more efficient networks is achieved by utilising restructuring of network topology (virtually the air in the way network implementation is irrespective of certain topologies, clocks
  • variable bandwidth allocation and speed the user information between stations and/or control etc mechanisms is generally shown by WPs applied the interconnections of station 10, 11 and 12 In the application example are shown methods etc
  • the dotted lines between pairs of WPs are functions and means included data to be visualising a maximum total possible differently routed (A-A, C-C, etc ) even if data bandwidth between the respective stations originates and/or terminates at both ends
  • Number 4011 at station 10 represent a inclusive if a common UP TP are used or not maximum possible transmitted rate at a for all traffic specific WP and 3011 represents a maximum receivable received rate (example station 10,
  • the dashed lines a, b and c is here generally 11
  • the corresponding figures for station 11 is representing the routes The bandwidth are 3010 and 4010
  • the indication 4001 between represented by 10-12, 10-11 and 11-12 which station 10 and 11 and 3001 represents the means to correspond to a number of suballocated actual transfer rate to and from the channels at operating on certain selected respective W
  • the image generally visualises an example of applications 1010' including telephony how an allocated rates (4002) for transferring applications and or similar applications information (A) through the air from station 11 requiring seamless transparent transfer of data to 10 Further an allocated rate (4005) for and data application etc is shown under a transferring information (B) through the air from stations (14) station 12 to 11 It is also the meaning to generally visualise that the modulation level
  • the block 6000 means to generally symbolise and/or information rates may be different
  • This an external wireless access system applied to is visualised in different structures on the station 10 and/or an internally virtually created information blocks of data transferred wireless access system within W-SENS
  • the 11/100/WP/T1 for station 11-10 Respective wireless access is demonstrating ability to 12/100A ⁇ /P/T1 for station 12 - 10
  • These two connect another station 14 via its WP
  • This is flow are combined shown to be transferred into thought at least applicable as it (6000) a WP which applies a capacity for the transfer operates as an internally created virtual access
  • Figure 16 various scattered functional units 10/1 , etc at a
  • the functional description of 10/1 , 10/2 etc does not severely effects standard flows of could be described as the description of a data at least within a reasonable number of station etc I e switching and/or routing for air repeating steps in an area traffic as well as optional connections of Ups
  • the functional unit 10/1 ,10/2 etc include etc would be applicable as is generally means for connecting the respective functional visualised in the figure unit 10/1 etc to user applications (illustrated by port 100 etc ) i e also as descnber visualised
  • connections 1001 ' 100N' could for station 10, 11 etc in other figures generally be seen similar to 100, 101 , etc earlier described general station model as in Further resembles with earlier possible views figure 4 and 5
  • These ports 1001' etc could be of systems implementations Means are seen as an ordinary user port of a included to 10', 10/1 10/2 etc for the ability to switching/routing platform connecting the set-up, supervise and control, schematically scattered switches/routers 10/1 , 10/2 etc shown by 200/1 for a remote switched function where signalling between 10/1 , etc, and 10' is and/or 210 at WP or 200' for an integrated applied logically via standard communication solution at 10' Means are included to perform
  • the connection 1001 ' etc may be based on these operations from any of the ports visualised including at virtually at any station
  • the idea with this figure is to exemplify and and/or at external network functional unit 200". further explain possible use of various stations Means included management functions to be and configurations, how they are interrelated based on Simple Network Management
  • the functional units R10'", R11 '" etc. are on one switching function.
  • Another sub-station considered to external connectionless 11/1 represents a sub switching functions networks. If ATM switching or combinations interrelated with another switch/router, 11 '.
  • the where used (in stead of the Ethernet based port visualised on station 11 represent the switching) it could represent such networks.
  • communications services for circuit that port I.e. means are included at subPSTN, DTM and/or ATM would be applicable stations for external applications similar to into this figure for transparent transmission etc. what has been described for station. as generally described in figure 7d.
  • the square 9000 generally indicate stations and/or sub-stations, which are directly
  • Means for network planning, routing, number of users scattered in a specific communications set-up, supervision and geographical area including wireless switching control of one station function 10/1 , 10', services and/or connections to external corresponding WP and remote WPs is communications services. manageable via network management functions accessed via any of these functional Various types of means for network units. management set-up, control and supervision of See also explanations of the figures 17 and 18. W-SENS and applied external networks are generally visualised available at any of the
  • the figures 17 a and b are generally means to logically access network visualising two examples of many other management functions, databases, etc. via possible building structures of stations in W- user ports as well.
  • Means for setinterrelated communication with each other up, control and supervise is applicable meaning that pair of WPs between of the two principally at any location. can establish and perform as been described in this document.
  • Other types of building Figure 19 a and b and c structures than shown are of course The idea with figure 19 is to show one obtainable. example, of many possible solutions of
  • the figure 17 a shows one station with a protocol applied for the transfer of digital bits switching functionality, which would be capable and byte structure on each carrier, sub-carrier of connecting a number of and various types of etc. WPs. Methods functions and means are included to
  • the figure 17 b shows an example of a spliced • changes of levels of error corrections (by arrangement of switching functions of a station allowing variable extra transfer capacity to consisting of two scattered sub-stations be used) functions 10/1 , 10/2 connected to 10'. ⁇ time division multiple operation
  • timing positions as a basis for time frame continuous streams are transferred between structure realisations (i.e. applied for pair of WPs on such carriers and any data TDMA versions including guard, including signalling, user data etc. can be synchronisation, switch time of antenna applied on it. directions if dynamic spatial directions In such a case on such carriers may other would be applied) logical protocols for communication solely take care of the required transfer between the WPs.
  • a certain case would be to arrange Data blocks represented by D1SxC1 etc. communications between WPs ports include adoption to a size (number of bits, synchronously. I.e. synchronous bytes etc.) that would correspond to certain communication is established between ports number or size of data on standard data where a number of sub-carriers are set-up, packets and ATM cells transferred.
  • a certain modulation level is setPrevious examples have generally shown up. I.e. this result in a transfer of a certain methods functions and means of arranging bandwidth and transfer capacity between WP transparently transfer capacity where capacity where the proposed protocol structures could etc. between WPs are repeatedly required by be used or ignored. Instead a logical protocol applying a timing order which could be cowould be applicable which including an ordinated between the multiple carriers overlayered structure on selected sub-carriers. irrespective of modulation levels error corrections selected etc. Considering as an
  • the background for the means of applying a interleaved on streams of data. protocol of this type is to show communication Signalling between WPs are needed even possibilities of both IP and ATP, signalling and under normal conditions. Using as an example signal processing between any pair of WPs TDMA, guard time, synchronisation of operating under various conditions. incoming data, timing of the scattered WPs etc. A further reason is that it includes means for is typically needed the timing segment arranging communications for WPs organised visualised as S1SxC1 , S2..etc. is usable. in a P-MP mode.
  • scheme like FDMA or TDMA or CDMA or ⁇ guard timing Exemplified by FDMA that information on transmitted bursts, needs changes in time slots FDMA needs ⁇ detection and synchronisation recovery of changes of sub-carriers regularly. received time fragments,
  • the figure 19 a shows an example of separate visualised between P1 like S1SxC1 , S2SxC1 sub-carriers each carrying user data and/or etc. on channel 1 this certain segments is signalling.
  • the number of selection of sub-carriers analyse of transfer capacity requirement of depending of each sub-channels appropriate data to be transferred between respective rate (modulation level) and the sum assigned WPs between the WPs for each particular hop analyse of transfer capacity requirement of real time and/or synchronous and/or
  • An example of structure is shown for data seamless synchronous transfers via WPs and/or data and/or signalling blocks of data, analyse data entered into WP from a (example fig 19 a) for CH2, D1SxC2 and switching function based on data protocols D2SxC2 etc )
  • the structure shown is including IP and various modifications understood to be consecutively repeatedly updates structured in time as indicated separate data which has to be prioritised to Co-ordination of timing between individual subbe transferred over WPs before other data channels is included
  • An example of (i e exemplified by IP - packet applied arrangements and means of time co-ordination with prioritised protocols in order) between the sub-channels, irrespective of the analyse real time transfer requirement of modulation level, are shown in the figure 19 b) data which have to be virtually In the example are two channels (CH1 and transparently transferred via WPs CH2) shown to be modulated differently, i e analyse of transfer requirement of data where CH1 transferring half the number of bits which is can be asynchronously that
  • organise multi-frame time structure as sub-carriers (sub-channels) indicated by T01 , T02 TOz, T01 , , allocate transfer capacity between WPs at which is arranged when this is required least between WPs (sub-WPs) in point-
  • the use of selected applied error correction codes ⁇ include adjustment of regulation of ⁇ combination of blocks and/or signalling appropriate received radio transmission blocks for user data transfer capacity, level to include a balance to the signalling capacity, signalling processing modulation level used and/or the detected capacity - error detection, error correction error performance required between WPs by adjusting radio transmitter energy Various modulation levels are applicable
  • ⁇ include dual direction signalling via one This is illustrated with an example Considering and/or multiple sub-carriers between WPs that a modulation method like 16 QAM were in order to adjust communication between used it and it transfer 4 data and 4 signal respective WPs in accordance to blocks (4 x DB64 + 4 x DB16) between any communication service requirement i e consecutive time increments, P1 , example including transfer capacity, Bit Error Rate T01 ,T02) If the capacity of a sub-channel was and transfer delay performance such that two frames T01 , T02 where representing 8 data blocks each representing
  • Carriers, sub-carriers etc are including 64 bytes these two time segments represents applicable adjustment capabilities to various totally 64 x 8 data bytes and the 4 x 8 multiplexing requirements based on timing signalling bytes
  • the signalling bytes protocol (one type of many possible represents totally 5-6 % and it could include exemplified in figure 19) applied Transfer of the use for error correction If the error user data, signalling between stations, WPs, detection and error correction requires more etc, including selection of various capacity for capacity, a selected part and/or number of signal processing is applicable to be mixed to such data block of 64 bytes could be used in meet transfer capacity and quality addition per frame (T01) and/or multi-frame requirements for each pair of WPs (T01 , T02 etc ) arrangements I e if one of the 8 data blocks where used an additional 12
  • Mixed signal processing and data include % is added to the 5 to 6 % for the signalling ability to repeatedly transmitted in blocks (like processing).
  • Other combinations are of course SISxCn, DI SxCn, S2SxCn, D2SxCn etc applicable by selecting other number of within T01 , T02 etc I e where a number of segments blocks could correspond to the number of bits
  • SISxCn, DI SxCn, S2SxCn, D2SxCn etc applicable by selecting other number of within T01 , T02 etc I e where a number of segments blocks could correspond to the number of bits
  • QAM modulation P1 where used, half of the numbers of bytes could be transferred in each time segment, but it may
  • DI SxCn data block
  • DB64 data block
  • SIxCn signalling block modulation levels
  • Method functions and means include respective signalling blocks, transfer rate on combining number of and types of data blocks carrier etc where only meant to show applied on carriers, sub-carriers for principles and examples for demonstration
  • Methods functions and means includes described in this document and in addition add applicability to vary the multiples of groups of specific WPs for the appropriate standard and OFDM modulated sub-carriers functions to appropriate software configuration which operate in parallel operation, i e to select an include to reside on processing functional unit appropriate number of groups at an selected (566/1 (or alike) appropriate modulation level to achieve a selected transfer rate between pairs of WPs is
  • the figure illustrates stations 10, 11 , 12 and applicable 17, 18 as stations considered equipped with
  • one group of sub-carriers of a modem set WPs (sub-WPs) arrange for transparent could deliver up to about 50 Mbit/s per 20 synchronous point-point communications MHz, based on a 64 QAM modulation scheme arrangements between stations and/or similar per sub-channel, four such groups of modems arranged for point-multipoint arrangements could deliver up 200 Mbit/s
  • four such groups of modems arranged for point-multipoint arrangements could deliver up 200 Mbit/s
  • a realisation of a I e within less than 80 MHz and eight groups Virtual Wireless Access (VWA) system could deliver 400 Mbit/s on 160 MHz connected at stations 12 as a central (or base) bandwidth VWA12
  • the central station connect a number of station 13, 15, 14 in point - multipoint mode
  • the actual communication between WPs are able to virtually acting as as including the station functions is applicable to terminals (VWA 14, VWA 15) in addition meet existing and/or evolving co-existing station VWA13 is additionally designed to work and/or interoperability standards in the wireless as a repeater (with add/drop capability of user area is included Both as WP are used as traffic shown by VW100 1010), for the terminal multiple transmission means between stations VWA 16 and/or when WPs and station functionality's
  • the station VWA13 is applicable to operate as are integrated with software functions so as to a central by WP 551 , which communicated virtually create emulation of stations in wireless with VWA16 and other stations typically below access systems to reside on stations in W- the line of sight to allow access towards SENS VWA12
  • I e VWA station which either operate as
  • variable possible air interfaces is central, terminal and repeater, i e similar to a applicable to be included derivable from the wireless access is applicable by the use of the optional means of the basic arrangements of methods functions and means basically transfer of user data, signalling and coding in explained for the W-SENS sub-channels I e virtually are one or more Should such functions be required it would be systems for fixed point to point wireless applicable by assigning appropriate functioning communication, point-multipoint system and/or WPs for such functions virtually in any number multipoint arrangements applicable for fixed at any station
  • a WP organised to and/or mobile wireless solutions including operate as central exemplified at station 12 TDMA and/or FDMA and/or CDMA and/or W- would include connection to the switching CDMA applicable, including a spatial SDMA function visualised as 2BS i e utilising the approach should it be needed actual stations switching functionality it is
  • variable kind of proprietary air operating on and/or any of the W-SENS protocols is applicable to be included in parallel stations In addition it is included possible at any station
  • Method functions and means are included for switching/routing functions at stations could WPs organised to operate in P-MP mode in support to perform possible alternative order to connect stations and switching transparent flow of data between stations via functions in such a way as WPs
  • Each assigned WP to a station includes
  • a WP working as central for other WPs a transfer capacity and a selection of possible sharing its capacity with a number of transfer capacity, which is typically much less "underlying" WPs, such underlying WPs than the total switching function capacity at the include functions and means being able to same station commonly share its capacity with the central (VWA12, 551/VW2)
  • VWA12, 551/VW2 the central
  • a WP which is sharing its capacity with SENS are the strengths with the method other stations (example 551 towards VWA exemplified by the use of a fairly simple type of 12), working as an underlying WP to VW12 station fig 22 a It is equally structured, limited include functions and means to share its to four station connections in various directions transmission recourse capacity with other where WPs are arranged for point-point stations (example VW21 ) as a central communication Station is in this example is
  • a WP which is working as an underlying limited to being able to connect four other station towards a central includes ability to stations and directions to simplify the work as an underlying to other central WPs explanations
  • the figure is showing an idealised and/or theoretical structure in form of a star network
  • the W-SENS type of network is a new network approach, however the possible use of various Figure 22 a is indicating a general model communications ports (WPs) (in fact in parallel saying that if every "layer-level" of stations can on the same station) makes it possible to apply connect another "layer” of station.
  • WPs general model communications ports
  • This use of the method and selected sub- manufactures base station methods is shown that even with a possibility to connect a limited number of stations (in the
  • Methods functions and means are included to example here 4) a tremendous high number of ⁇ connect a WP to one station and virtually stations can be interrelated to each other work as a standard terminal to another Methods functions and means are included to manufactures base station switching/routing traffic rapidly through stations that results in transfer delays for users that in practice would be possible to neglect per quality (however, not taken into account any switching stage including a reasonable number eventual added overhead that are added for of such stages signal processing)
  • microsecond As an example switching delay assumed to be less than about one and/or a few
  • the results of the "automatic" potentially microseconds per station would allow a shortening of the radio (or laser) hop length seamless transparent flow in principle reduces fading margin requirement further neglecting the numbers of stations in any local significantly for wireless communication and/or regional area As such one specifically in humid climates
  • the microsecond is referred to about 300 m of methods functions and means for balance propagation delay through the air, i e this and required quality, modulation level, signal even delays which would be much higher is processing etc included to optimise W-SENS possible to neglect solution described in this document in areas is
  • practical communications system improving with a growing number of stations implementation figures of higher 10, 20, 30 or and in fact users This leads to a self- more would still be possible to ignore generating positive effect on capacity and quality in a given area and on a given
  • Methods functions and means to support the frequency spectrum the more users that are expansion of networks and switching/routing possible to serve options with every new station added into new Transfer rates at specific selected sites and/or is included by improve of frequency re-use are improved in a
  • FIG. 22 b shows an example of a scenario of transfer capacity between pair of WPs are an expanded network over time to illustrate the applicable when hops are shortened effects of implementations of a W-SENS An example of this effect is that a maintained approach transmission power level and a reduction of the hop lengths to half the distance results in a
  • the figure shows how network and stations gain of 6 dB over noise As an example the interrelation is changed as new stations are difference between a carrier to noise figure of added It is also the meaning to visualise how QPSK and a modulation level like 16 QAM is routing alternatives are increased the more that double transfer capacity of 16QAM leads stations available to a required increase of signal over noise
  • the dotted lines are visualising established about
  • the increased signalling level is applicable disconnect as visualised by 300x and 300y At to be used to increase transfer rate
  • By initially stages may long hops (between station changing the modulation level from QPSK to 10 and 11 hop 300 etc ) normally be required 16 QAM a doubling of the transfer rate would
  • WPs to be in principle be applicable at about maintained equipped mainly for radio transmission in appropriate frequency bands as generally Methods functions and means are included to indicated by 300 between stations 10, 11 etc connect stations equipped with WPs requiring less and less radiated power the denser the
  • stations are located and/or very high frequency radios and/or very low power radio heads (highly integrated and Methods functions and means are included to low cost) would be applicable
  • This is generally ⁇ use short range high transfer speed visualised by, 10x etc , meaning the ability to communications devices WPs applied on applying an increasing amount of stations that stations are of different type then originally required for ⁇ expand network area coverage gradually a W-SENS network approach I e the degree in size by using short range WPs by of such stations is expanding in relation to applying fast switching/routing capabilities those initially applied the denser the network is ⁇ combine use of WPs including long hop getting and the lower the cost for each new capabilities for rapid large W-SENS station network area coverage's and the use of
  • WPs may be powerful are the W-SENS network getting based on radio and/or light-wave frequencies or around these typically used for laser
  • the figure 22 b is describing a scenario with a growing number of stations along the time Communication directly between station 10 At time 1 visualised may be to connect some and 11 is shown to applying one pair of WPs few users wirelessly at fairly distant away from based on radio and the other on laser It could a network node point connected to a fibre as an example also be a number of pairs of backbone passing a city, sub-urban region etc WPs using the same radio band (but different frequency it not appropriate spread spectrum
  • the scenario at time 2 is meaning to visualise technologies where applied, i e frequency how a considerable number of stations have hopping and/or channel coding) or using totally been connected It is visualised that the hop different frequency bands between the WPs length is relatively shorted than originally in Method functions means includes addition many more potential places occur ⁇ application of more than one WP at where traffic could be dropped and/or inserted stations to arrange communication with a to an existing fibre backbone which could corresponding set of WPs at another offload traffic trough the air if required in order station to improve the spectrum efficiency further ⁇ arrange traffic information transfer between any selected UPs and/or TPs etc
  • the scenario at time 3 meaning to show an to be transferred via more than one WP even denser station structures where many more users are connected As the network
  • One of the reason for this is to make it possible increases into density are also the use of new to use both high bandwidth high transfer rate stations for low power radiation, high frequency communication at least on one pair of ports (including laser) applicable and to use at least one pair of lower speed WPs working in parallel and/or taking and further possible route I e ports 1000 of stations 10 and 11 could communicate via the ⁇ regulate power connect or disconnect paralleled arranged WPs (beams 320, 315) or respective WPs in accordance is applied via the other route via station 13 (321 ,316, ⁇ control polarisation of antennas 323,317) ⁇ apply cross polarised and/or single
  • WPs to
  • any of the possible pair of WP ⁇ be arranged full port transparent connections between stations could be deleted communication capacity between stations and WPs which could offer properly transferred at least based on connectionless switching quality could be selected as an example if functions quality degrades etc I e utilising very high ⁇ include ability to be arranged for capacity frequency radio bands and/or laser etc which transparency in correspondence to could offer very high bandwidth and transfer standard port (UP/TP) based on standard capacity under normal conditions under long rates used on Ethernet standards periods is applicable
  • UP/TP transfer standard port
  • WPs including transparent 10 Mbit/s combined with WPs operating on lower radio and/or semi-duplex and or duplex 100 frequencies typically on less bandwidth Mbit/s and/or duplex 1000 Mbit/s available thus offering lower transfer rates but ⁇ transparency assignment of transfer with much higher probability of availability to capacity between ports including secure the communication assignment of capacity permanently to the Method
  • Sensitivity to transfer quality degradation ⁇ methods functions and means are included effected by air environment increases with to assign and/or disconnect up to the full longer hops and higher frequencies
  • ⁇ variation capability of bandwidth could be arranged for full bandwidth and/or a
  • the idea with this figure is to demonstrate a in parallel to other types of connections for possible scenario of many possible to occur in example to internally in W-SENS switch traffic reality
  • the W-SENS is at multiple selected between stations and ports stations showed applied via 1000 to another backbone network 1055, here supposed to be Figure 25 a a fibre-based solution
  • the idea with this figure is to demonstrate the possibilities to route traffic and terminate at multiple inherent built in capabilities in highly redundant locations, including offload of the air dense station environment in W-SENS by terminate traffic at nearest backbone (fibre, approaches etc ) as it may be applicable Fibre backbone ring solutions include often ability to access
  • the "A" in upper left hand is visualising radio traffic from either side of the ring at add/drop communication between two stations, 11a and locations to improve availability TP 12a
  • Only one antenna beam direction 320A is arrangements at W-SENS stations include shown as mentioned earlier in the document means to add/drop traffic between fibre and W- (to simplify drawings)
  • Each station 11a and 12b have the possibility capability on fibre rings at the connections to be expanded to more stations, directions, point between W-SENS stations and fibre improving the transfer capacity in total through backbones such station, i e by assigning WPs and
  • the hop length has generally a considerable capacity between ports at station 11a and 12a strong influence on the overall quality
  • the transfer performance for wireless communication in rate between 11a-13b and 13b 12a could be comparison to other factors Reducing it increased thus the new route via the shorter generally would improve significantly improve hops could offer a higher transfer capacity than the use of wireless even and specifically for the corresponding between 11a - 12a on a electromagnetic frequencies above the radio given frequency spectrum bands
  • WPs (normally 550) shown as a Between stations 12a and 13a is the capacity separated in a transmit section 554 and a shown to be 11-12C1 (comparable to 11-12C receive section 553, indicating a transparent for case "A") and added equal capacity 11- flow of data at a selected bandwidth and 12C2 Between stations 12a and 13a is equally transfer capacity in either direction of a WP the capacity 13-12C1 (comparable to 11-12C) Stations are shown equipped with WPs used and 12-12C2 showing a doubled transfer for transfer of data packets like IP etc for capacity synchronous, seamless synchronous, and/or asynchronous transfers In addition WPs adopted for point-point and/or point-multipoint
  • This figure is generally visualising that the on ATM switching functions applicable for occupied spectrum per hop would be transfer of data based on synchronous, significantly decreased by the use of reduced seamless synchronous and or asynchronous hop length if the same transfer quality and port standards transfer capacity were concerned for the new shorter hops In the case of using ATM switching and
  • the rectangles represents the average applying Ethernet ports for transfer at least spectrum area occupation (on way) and the WPs includes methods functions and means dotted lines (triangle) is schematically to visualising radiation occupation of a main lobe ⁇ analyse data applied on ATM cells which of a directed antenna have to be transferred
  • FIG. 25 c ATM switch function include ability to
  • This figure is illustrating a possible further convert Ethernet packets into cells improvement of transfer capacity on a limited ⁇ data on ATM cells entering into a WP for frequency bandwidth It illustrates the use of transfer to a corresponding WP is relatively increase of variations of elevations detectable in terms of addressing and/or in terms of transfer priority
  • variable WP capacity For connectionless type of switching assigned each hop etc is shown applied by the variable WP capacity is shown as 5541 respective 5531 antenna lobe sizes indicated I e station 11 is and for ATM as 554A and 553A further away than station 17
  • lobes which point to an between the WPs does not mean that it is or overlapping direction is separated in either has to be the same frequency, bandwidth, frequency and/or coding for continuous capacity etc streams of data between stations or in time for burst communication not to interfere
  • the possible selectable transfer rate between In figure 29 is also shown complementary in any transmit or receive direction of the WPs information (to this figure description) about are visualised by 4003 and 3003 possible means of arranging communication
  • Station 10 shows a possible adaptive Some of many possible antenna system interconnectivity point between stations based solutions would be to use a set of antennas on packet switching and/or ATM switching by using common reflectors with applicable the use of a specific WP adopted for distribution and/or switching arrangements communication with a stations (19) based on Alternatively phased array antennas supporting ATM switching functions the possible use of multiple antenna beams each beam being applicable to use for one WP
  • each WP is to be connected to method functions and means of antenna an antenna lobe that each works in its specific arrangements for stations, WPs and/or sub- direction
  • the antenna system would be WPs arranged by selected directed antennas, either
  • antennas include not single fixed antenna, parabolic, horns etc only radio but also corresponding optical Alternatively is the use of a common reflector means for transmit and/or receive laser or for multiple horns considered By using light-wave communication in one and/multiple multiple WPs the required area coverage or directions direction is selected
  • FIG. 27 a digital switching traffic between the WP and
  • the figure 27a is exemplifying a station, the other ports
  • the possible area cover is
  • ⁇ a number of main lobes are possible to functions and means for sharing either radio locate in parallel in wanted directions for and/or inclusive or modem and communicate each of the WPs and/or sub-WPs in various directions including spatial
  • any WP may select directions which may arrangement either by shifting directions in overlap in area and time with another time or to selectively handle multiple directions parallel WP thus requiring either in parallel
  • the area coverage is generally separation in frequency and/or time shown to be 333 segments if applied Time-sharing as equipment resource sharing less capacity A total capacity is this case principle is applicable
  • a radio head, 568/569, spliced exemplified by FB4, FB8 etc is shown to be shared via the functional unit RSW It include capability to arrange at least a Figure 28 an antenna lobe in a wanted direction in Methods functions means included is to selected time by switching between antenna ⁇ set-up basics at installation time, lobe directions in time which means to use one ⁇ bandwidth transfer capacity between WPs, radio to be switched in multiple directions to capacity allocation principles, communicate with other WPs in P-MP mode ⁇ re-configure, Time sharing by the use of switching an WP ⁇ define routing alternatives, including modem with other WPs required ⁇ set quality performance, switching on intermediate level, ISW
  • Methods functions and means to communicate management system arrangement In the in various directions includes intermediate example given may include information about frequencies distribution and/or switching It stations that are connected with each other via would include the use of practical and low cost WPs, frequencies are occupied, transfer rate - implementations I e distribution and/or bandwidth allocation per pair of WPs, quality switching is applied on performance, power regulation, routing,
  • the figure shows complementary means for directly integrated to antenna feeder - sharing arranging a WP and variable modem reduces unnecessarily power dissipation capability, by part capacity, FB, or up to full on radio frequency level modem capability FBx, in various directions
  • Figure 27 d Figure 29 a) shows a time division splice via an
  • an intermediate frequency switch ISW for TDMA additional example of methods functions and or TDMA/SDMA or TDM/TDMA
  • ISW for TDMA additional example of methods functions and or TDMA/SDMA or TDM/TDMA
  • the communication FB is distributed to multiple antennas pointing resources are applicable to be spliced into in required selected direction as a seamless multiple virtual Sub-WPs FDMA/SDMA alike application per WP or
  • the area coverage is shown to be 334 multiple virtual WPs if the modem is spliced
  • an additional arrangement into more then one FB visualised in figure 6 is applicable
  • the creation of a number of sub-WP 550/1 could Figure 29 c and d shows a similar situation be seen as a virtual WP but work
  • Figure 29 e is finally visualising a general ⁇ control communications and transfer model of possible means for a W-SENS based assignments with a corresponding station which contains directional control functional unit on a corresponding station digitally, performed via 10/10710/1 etc and WP between the WPs Means for internal direction ⁇ supervise traffic performance control of WP communicating with more than ⁇ supervise transfer quality between WP one WP at various locations via intermediate « control error correction/modulation level frequency and/or radio frequency using ⁇ create multiple virtual station function of an frequency or time division and/ or frequency access station division Means for such equipment resource sharing methodology is being established for Method functions and means for virtual communications connections between multiple emulation of required functions of 566/1 at switches This communications arrangements different location is included if such processing includes in addition similar set-up, control and unit is physically applied at an WP, sub-WP or supervisory arrangement as have been not Thus making it possible for one functional described for WPs arranged in pairs mainly processing unit to control more than one WP at One example of a WP which radio the same
  • the functional processing unit 566/1 is included with means for supervision and/or
  • a WP contains at least a port for connections management functionality's of W-SENS to and from another switch/router function stations, WPs, UPs, TPs etc at least selected and/or other network and/or ports to the air data is accessible dependent on authority connected for communication to and from Methods functions and means on network another WP at another station, T300 management applied for W-SENS include represents the Wireless Port Air Transmit, ⁇ authorisation, based on passwords
  • R 300 is called WPAR ⁇ selection of functions level authorisation
  • Methods functions and means includes and 566/1 and their communication with WPs to set communicate with another WP via respective switch side is including processing functional unit 566/1 to ⁇ IP addressing of logical units in W-SENS » controlling possible selection of ⁇ Fast switching/routing at least for data WP transmission rate by assigning subswitched data transfer channels and/or transfer rate per sub ⁇ MAC level based addressing/switching channel, ⁇ IPv 4, and/or IP v 6 signalling applicable
  • Equipping a station include application of at point mode Intermediate switching and or least a switching functional unit of a station, at power distribution ISW/IDS Radio frequency least a processing functional unit, at least one switching and/or distribution RSW/PDS I e applied WP, at least one UP and/or TP if traffic refers to possible selections of antenna beams has to be dropped or inserted and/or managed elevation in P-MP mode
  • 10/10,0/10/1 protocols for FDM and/or TDM and/or FDMA Such structure is applicable to allow for simple and/or TDMA, This including spatial installations with gradual expansion communication or not (fig 29) It includes capabilities in capacity, ports, functionality and possible realisation of virtual wireless access new WPs (sub-WPs) for new directions etc station functionality as central and/or terminal It contains at least a possible connection of a WP, at least one port for termination to either Figure 31 b, c 10/10/1 or 10' or 10" further means for gradual This figures complement the figure 31 a and expansion of more directions by
  • multiple functional units may be « establishment of communication transfer principally identical structured to 10/10,0, 10/1 capacity between one WP with more than which allow a basic station unit it self to be one other WP further expanded into more directions, capacity ⁇ using equipment resource sharing of either etc a WP inclusive modem function and/or in
  • Methods functions and means for arranging addition using the sharing of radio heads functional unit similar to 10/10/1 which in its for communication between one and turn could assign a group of functional units multiple other WPs like 10/10,0/10/1 is applicable as an example
  • This arrangement include establishment of when many directions and/or station have to transfer capacity of various transfer speeds be possible to assign from a location between WPs establishing communication with more then one other WP i e in P-MP mode of
  • Such station is designed for being able to operation transfer higher capacity in many more
  • P-MP modes of operation include directions via one and/or an number of WPs methods functions and means for WPs which could be connected to each basic ⁇ frequency (like no of sub-carriers selected station units 10/10,0/10/1 and modulation level)
  • An initial implementation ⁇ code (like operation on overlapping could be done by a) (10/10,0/10/1) which is frequencies where channels of data possible to expand to b) (10,1 ) an another information is applied and modulated on basic unit -with or without switching carriers including codes unique for each functionality and/or processing functional unit data channel to allow for carrying multiple This can be further being expanded gradually data channels on overlapping frequency into more units bands, CDMA, W-CDMA etc )
  • 10,0 and 10,1 is in this case considered ⁇ combinations of sharing principles to being prepared for fewer WPs and user ⁇ omni-directional antennas (including ports than the station type called 10/10/1 TDM/TDMA mode, FDM/FDMA mode, Further below are station 10' considered to CDM (Code Division Mult ⁇ plex ⁇ ng)/CDMA represent a general available connectionless and or combinations switch and/or router as mentioned in figures ⁇ spatial communication via directed 16, 17 and 18 and 10" is considered to antennas (etc ) between them as also represent an external network which users been described in relation to figures 29 a, is applicable and/or where such coding is b, c, d, e included in an overlayered protocol etc
  • ⁇ time to change selection of alternative 11 out represents at10+bt10 and in codes on applied data ar11+br11)
  • time segments realisation including frame ⁇ manually and/or automatically selection of structures transfer capacity is included applicable
  • the port 100 is visualising an example of a flow Additionally including P1 timing applicable port operating at a capacity in dual direction of to TDMA applications where one or multiple Fast Ethernet and/or Gigabit Ethernet and/or timeframes between P1 s is included to be STM - 1 etc possible to be used as time frames
  • the WP from station 10 - 11 is at the time shown set to an unbalanced rate indicating
  • Figure 32 c shows principally that the more transfer capacity being allocated from illustrated time separation of blocks of various station 10 to 11 then the opposite way size on carriers to make mentioned It is also visualised that if the WP of 10 where functionality's applicable in addition include a equipped for multiple directions either via a transparent flow utilisation, a+b, by an separate WP (or sub-WP) at 10 or via an P-MP overplayed logical protocol if this is deemed arrangement of the same WP thet is used to applicable, as it may in cases for point-point station 11
  • the transfer capacity through the WPs (sub-WPs) with very few changes of air between station 10 and 12 is shown to be transfer speeds on carriers, number of carriers, differently selected in comparison to station 10 frequency or where principally no error and 12 It is further illustrated that the capacity detection coding and/or error correction coding flow towards station 12 is less than in the opposite direction alternatives for local and/or remote transferees
  • the dotted lined 100 TL indicates application possible Incoming data (on CH1 CH3) from of logical protocol from the station 10 to an another station and WP arrives from the air via applied WP, which is detectable at WP and the antenna system, receiver, demodulator, reappropriate, applied signalling, is transferable packing functions unit DTO etc entering into to the other corresponding station, included the switch functions 2 * Received to the switch switching and/or routing instructions etc in packet forms this data can either be possible 100 RL includes logical protocol from the WP to control to be terminated fully or partly at a to the station 10 and in fact it includes possible location via one or several ports (PTE) or protocols from other stations concerned transferred to port 1 PTE It can in addition fully Any required signalling for stations, user ports or partly be transferred to the same or another terminal ports, network management ports etc WP, i e eventually in another direction via one is applicable to be transferred between each or a number of ports (PAI) pair of WPs
  • PTE ports
  • PAI number of ports
  • Communication protocols between pair of WP Methods functions and means include includes fast assignments and/or de- ⁇ co-ordination of transferees through WPs assignment of capacity, bandwidth in selected on overlapping directions which either risks steps of sub-carriers, modulation level, error to interfere and/or actually interfere with coding other WPs or sub-WPs is to co-ordinated is at least controllable via frequency
  • IP addressing of communications unit bandwidth selection for any WP identifications is included Using ⁇ timing control between WPs operating in connectionless switching based on IP leads to P-MP mode on overlapping frequencies the possible include of addressing set-up ⁇ means for other counter measures to supervision and control from any port handle interference and/or optimise 210/210 * /200 and or user ports (100 etc ) as transfer quality in general is applicable for well WP transfers
  • the figure shows an example of one of many control, coding, and error correction possible ways of realisation of functions of a ⁇ controlling the balance of traffic basic station and/or WP function, based on the requirements between WPs and stations in method and sub-methods mentioned It is just order to make it possible to deliver multiple shown as an example to verify the possibility to communications service transfers with realise a W-SENS approach based on a limited priority between users and or application number of basic functional core units It is of and/or types of transfers, example course only one example and many other seamless synchronous or synchronous possibilities to realise stations WPs ports etc data is higher prioritised than interactive would be possible data
  • connectionless switching is An example given below shows the possible considered in the example capacity strengths of a W-SENS solution
  • ports include connection of 10 Mbit/s 100 in the figure
  • a number of ports are principally Mbit s, 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet standard ports shown be to be possible to connect to 2 *
  • the (and/or indirectly transport of standard ATM number and the specific types of ports would SDH SONET ports up to at least 155 Mbit/s) depend in actual requirement type or ports and Further estimates that such switch function connections to 2* could vary from installation to would be capable of switching multiple 1 Gbit/s installation
  • a possible network management ports and that all basic switch functions could port 210olP is visualised be physically realised in one or a few chip sets
  • considering as an example figure 31a i e at neglected production cost and size and figure 33 it is shown how data from a local Thus, every W-SENS stations
  • the figure generally illustrates the multiple I e each new station at each new location is direction and multiple possible switching potential increasing the total transfer capacity in the air for a geographical region functions for protocol analyse volume analyse considerable and in addition it allow for for bandwidth requirements, re-structure of multiple more routes to be applied by using received data are represented by DTO and multiple WPs
  • every new station is DTI potentially adding capacity to be possible to be Additional signalling is applicable to the data utilised by other stations and users in a certain flow between WPs for the actual control of geographical area and/or it allow expansion of communication between WPs the area service coverage New station allow DIQR and DIQT represent digital interfaces shortened hop lengths, increased routing towards modulator (567) and demodulator alternatives, reduced transmission power, (552) arrangements increased spectrum utilisation etc which is
  • the signal 2110T * represent transmit control further helping to better utilise every such new functional signals including of settings of the station for the air and/or potentially for the transfer flow between the actual WPs and/or ground application (at customers locations as sub-WPs (like
  • Example, a group of 10 000 stations (16 Gbit/s data to be transmitted, buffer memory x 10 000) spread in a city represents a total performance - overload etc based on queuing switching and potential transfer capacity on buffer memory, detection of capacity through the air of 160 Terabit/s requirement of prioritised data transfer - like
  • quality performance etc I e it are a functional processing unit included where represents the base for speed control - software programs include to execute the modulation level settings, level of error mentioned method function and means in detection and correction, etc i e to balance combination with hardware and firm ware the actual transfer requirement through the air included
  • the actual traffic capacity and type of functional unit represented by 566/1
  • the signal 2101 R * represent receive control control of other functional units typically via the including and supervision of received data switch I e the ability to interact between data quality, instructions from the
  • the shown fast switch allow transparent flow of transfer under the time the transfer rate data between is ports, 1 PAI yPAI and available between WPs are less than peek 1 PTE xPTE for synchronous or asynchronous data allowed is visualised by 551/M and/or type of data flows requirements with a 551 MUP (figure 5) minimum delay, i e to allow for traffic routing to As an example only considering a port 1 PTE is pass multiple stations with insignificant time applicable to Gigabit Ethernet (1000 Mbit/s in delays for most standards application Internal and out to the WP) and that 200 Mbit s is the buffer memories are considered built in and maximum capacity to be possible to transfer in additional memories are included for functions each direction between a specific pair of WPs as desc ⁇ ber fig 12 551/M, i e applicable to Consider that synchronised and/or seamless increase the efficiently of handling interactive data applied to be transferred is "tagged" with data transfer bandwidth allocations appropriate IP signalling i e which would allow DIR and DIT interfaces represent the digital such data packets to
  • Methods functions and means is applied for station The use of highly integrated analysing data transfer requirements components would make it possible assign considered being required to be sent as real WPs or stations virtually on roof tops behind a time data and/or interactively small antenna system for high frequency radio
  • One example is to "tag" and detect real time (typically > 10 GHz) or laser heads for such data with protocols higher priority than other transmission means data
  • Method functions and means are thus Radio heads laser transmitters receivers etc included to enable handling of differently on high frequencies where at least radio heads tagged data separated should be possible to design for highly
  • ⁇ data transfers accepting variable speeds stations and or WPs on antennas or separated include the routing via intermediate via intermediate cables as been previously memories 551 M etc to handle the traffic described peaks by smoothing out the transfer time delay when the capacity through WPs is This could be specifically valuable to arrange less then a temporary need as it reduces RF loss and the required output
  • the packet decoder could include support of example However this is only general Ethernet II, IEEE 802 3/802 2 SNAP, IEEE examples and may have nothing to do with 803 3/802 2, Netware 802 3 RAW for IPX only actual application of information on sub- carriers A similar case is shown for the Effective and increased transfer capability received data It also include signalling - modulation speed and number of information from a corresponding WP (shown possible routes are increased as 211 OR * ) which could be used at appropriate Effective and increased redundancy - the processing function 566/1 and/or transferred routing alternatives are increased with further increasing number of stations applied in an area

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
  • Data Exchanges In Wide-Area Networks (AREA)
  • Radio Relay Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The invention relates to a network arrangement with switching and routing working in interaction with a wireless system including a radio network with variable capacity adaptation, a station for wireless switching and communication, and a port unit therefor. The core of the arrangement is a station comprising: at least one wireless port (WP) for wireless communication with another station; at least one port (UP/TP) for communication with a user or a network; an internal switching unit for switching (routing) traffic between stations and/or ports.

Description

NETWORK ARRANGEMENT, STATION FOR WIRELESS SWITCHING, AND PORT UNIT THEREFOR
Field of invention This invention relates to a new physical and logical communications network and an architecture based on adoption of stations with wireless communication and switching between ports. The network solution could typically be implemented as a terrestrial network servicing multiple users at scattered locations.
Background
The invention offers principally any type of digital communication and/or distribution including broadband services by connecting users or applications at multiple stations' locations in an area which may be local or regional when applied as a terrestrial network. The network flexibility, capacity and capabilities are capable of growing as the number of stations is increasing. The invention provides a self-generating capability expansion the more the network i.e. the more stations is growing.
Stations include means for wireless communication between station sites, including very high capacity (in relation to the capacity per port) and fast switching function capability to switch and route digital data between sites through pairs of ports arranged for selected transfer capacity and to achieve seamless transparent flows of data with principally negligible time delay for the respective user data flows routed through such station. Wireless transmission through each pair of ports through the air includes conversion of digital information to be applied on one or more carriers. These carriers are up- or down-converted to suitable high frequencies including radio bands and/or laser frequencies.
The invention also relates to practical system implementations, and a primary focus has been laid on connectionless Ethernet and IP protocol switching and/routing as it ideally combined with the invention. However, the invention does not exclude use of other switching solutions like ATM. In addition, conversion enabling transfer of other types of signals than the used switching platform is described.
State of the art
Methods used in fixed terrestrial communication systems including wireless methods for transferring digital information for data and telecommunication applications varies typically depending on transfer requirements. Synchronous, asynchronous, symmetric or asymmetric transmission are typically arranged in different ways.
One prior method is to establish fixed connections without bandwidth variation for any uplink or downlink direction as it is done with point - point radio links. These are typically used for bit transparent continuous flows and no bandwidth or capacity variation between applications regardless of traffic demands or if interference occurs.
Another prior method is to arrange a wireless access structure (fixed and/or mobile applications) where a station (central/base) is connected to a high capacity backbone network for a number of geographically scattered telecommunication users' via remote wireless terminals.
A central wireless node is accessing users to another network (typically backbone) via wireless terminals placed at or near the location of the users. In addition repeaters with or without drop and insert traffic capabilities may be used to expand the coverage in cases where the central node is not able to connect directly.
Various wireless systems and solutions have been implemented or proposed over the years in order to support multiple scattered users in an area. This ranges from simple radio links connecting scattered groups of users remotely via telecommunications switches for telephony or switching/routing units for data users. The wireless access design approaches have been designed so that the wireless accesses were meant to virtually replace a wire etc. and connect users to a switching network that is different to the access system. This is a similar situation as with the copper wire for telephony networks, RadioLan like IEEE 802.11 etc. for data network access.
The user at the end in these cases has a simple radio terminal which does not need advanced functionality and the central or base station includes connection to one switching and/or routing platforms. In the radio access solutions the capacity and means (radio etc.) of a central station are shared by a group of terminals arranged in various schemes, typically arranged in a star topology point-multipoint (P-MP) but also more complex topologies exist. The access solutions includes typically sharing in time, frequency and codes TDMA, FDMA, CDMA or combinations thereof in order to share common equipment and radio transmission capacity among multiple users, with variable capacity demands for each connection. In addition optionally SDMA is provided by steerable (narrow) antenna beams applied in order to save spectrum, allow more users, increase the transmission speed, and decrease the influence of multi-path propagation. The invention
The invention offers a wireless solution including: establishment of connection of backbone solutions to other systems, accesses to other switching and /or routing platforms, switched connections between base stations or similar of internal inherent and/or external wireless access solutions and/or communications between users in wireless system including inherent Internet network functionality and/or with users in inherent or external wireless access solutions (including radio Ian, WLAN) fixed as well as mobile and, connections between connected users connected within a wireless solution to applications outside of such system. Backbone solutions and user traffic capability and inherent Internet capability transfer refer to digital transmission connection of capacities required for speech, video conferencing and media distribution from kbit to few Mbit/s (like El/Tl, E2/T2, E3/T3, 10 Mbit/s) up to at least 100 Mbit/s, 25, 52, 155 Mbit/s (STM-1 SDH ATM or SONET transfer capacities) and gradually up to at least 1000 Mbit/s or more in order to include through broadband traffic and simultaneous multi user performance for media entertainment and business traffic. In fact transfer rates towards and including 1000 Mbit/s or multiples of it, may be applicable in radio and/or laser transmission applications via the wireless ports of the wireless system which inherently also is designed to be capable of supporting both high speed and secure communication arrangements.
The invention includes support of single and/or groups of users and communications services similar to leased lines or similar to virtual leased lines (with varying demands and capacity over time) between external applications and users ranging from a simple voice IP to advanced Internet video streaming services like product animations and entertainment films, news gathering etc. requiring up to one Mbit/s or 10 Mbit/s or much more per individual user on demand.
The invention provides various routing alternatives in order to improve transfer capacity in a network implemented, gain improved frequency re-use capability, gain security etc.
The invention is shown realised into systems based on fast connectionless type of switching. This type of switching function is shown to include adaptive wireless communication means between selected pairs of ports. Packet-oriented transmission services including control of various Internet Protocol (IP) based solutions are supported. This include means to support of interactive bursted data traffic exemplified by TCP/IP protocol or similar. Additionally the invention handles IP based real time synchronous or seamless synchronism or near real-time IP protocols in order to support continuous streams of data typically required for voice and/or image transfer through such wireless systems.
A station is considered combined with at least one high capacity switch function with comprehensive switching and/or routing functionalities between User Ports or Terminal Ports (UPs or TPs) and Wireless Ports (WPs). A WP contains at least one wireless receiver and transmitter and modulator-demodulator (modem) and means to optimise transfer rate, quality etc. between WPs. Means are included for coordination of physical bandwidth to optimise frequency re-use, organise communication between each pair of WPs and UPs / TPs. Such means include selective adoption of more than one sub-carrier, selection of transmission speed on sub-carriers or sub-channels at least for radio transmission. Means are included to signal information from packet data including real time IP and/or interactive IP data to be transferred through WPs to detect the bandwidth or capacity transfer requirement between each pair of WPs based on the information derived from the inherent switch (routing) function and transfer such information to respective WP and/or WPs involved in the transaction to make it possible to adopt to required capacity and quality performance. Means are inherently included at each WP to receive control information and/or transmit control information i.e. to select carrier and/or sub-carrier set number of carriers (bandwidth), adjust speed, adjust selective sub-channel level (to meet quality and/or standard spectrum mask performance), adjust error correction to meet appropriate quality performance, and adjust frequency on individual carriers and/or groups of carriers.
The invention enables traffic and/or distribution of data between stations to be switched/routed effectively between the wireless ports and the user or terminal ports based on the route needed, bandwidth availability, terrain and line of sight situation, redundant routing for security and/or capacity and/or based on sharing of frequency spectrum requirement in space with others to avoid degradation interference. Data is switched, routed, dropped, or inserted at any place where a station exists. In addition each new station inherently increases the total capacity, total wireless capacity and increases routing capability and in fact potential re-use efficiency in an area as means for adopting to new routing alternatives or set-ups and variable transmission performance capabilities is applied such as control of OFDM modems and transmitted energy and new direction alternatives when new stations are inserted.
The implementation of the method as described based on fast switches includes the possibility to establish principally unrestricted communications network topologies over relatively large areas locally regionally i.e. from about a few meters to tens of kilometres or more (before traffic is trunked through other backbone solutions like fibre etc. to another area) because the design of the switching function is such that a negligible time delay loss is achievable using fast connectionless switch platforms. Fast switching means a relatively short time delay per station in relation to the communication services that are transferred and passing stations. For dual communication like speech- or video telephony 4-5 ms may be required in total. As an example, this allows 100 microseconds per station when up to about 40 - 50 hops in total are taking part in an eventual conversation. In addition high speed switching capacity performance is applied, in comparison to the traffic transfer capacity between each pair of WPs, at least at stations through which traffic shall be routed, thus allowing potentially multiple WPs to be applied in various directions to scattered stations and users. This further improves the possibilities to re-use frequency spectrum more efficiently in particular when directed antenna beams are being used for communication between wireless ports. Due to the increased separation in elevations of beams, the more stations used in an area the more frequency resource sharing is optimised in such area.
The invention could be implemented into various systems and configurations using either packet types of switching and/routing including Internet Protocol (IP) connectionless based switching and routing at each station and/or Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) type of circuit or cell-oriented or connection types of switching. Other switching methods or protocols could be applied with means to adopt allocated traffic to appropriate transfer through the air.
Highly integrated high speed fast switching units with routing capabilities emerge on the market today which makes it possible to ignore the physical size and influence of such functions even if they where inserted at each station. Furthermore, with the massive use these switches, these could be produced at a significantly reduced cost. This would allow low cost and feasible size stations which allow implementation behind a window, on a wall, a rooftop where the electronics is typically so small that it easily may be located behind a radio antenna, laser transmitter/receiver or similar. The invention includes that variable WPs can be working in accordance with different radio transmission and radio access standard requirements including means in OFDM modems enabling to select directly and/or control remotely via network management functions and/or automatically depending on bandwidth and/or capacity and/or quality requirement. The invention enables resource-sharing in wireless ports with methods such as TDMA, FDMA, CDMA and spread spectrum Frequency Hopping as in the radiolan access standard IEEE 802.11 traditionally used for access radio solutions with or without SDMA. In addition means using OFDM modems to perform traffic flows between radio based WPs is applicable to perform communication between WPs including means to control bandwidth, speed, transmission power, quality, standard emulation etc.
In the case of OFDM, the invention provides for assigning of selected activation and number of selected sub-channels (and/or sub-carriers) allowing gradual selection of the required bandwidth and transfer capacity between each pair of ports. It includes inherently or actively further means for adjustments between each pair of ports; possible selection of modulation level per sub-channel, error correction per subchannel, transmission power regulation per sub-channel and groups of channels in relation to transfer quality performance requirements, hop lengths, speed requirements, control of actual frequency spectrum performance requirement, adoption to wireless access or radio link spectrum and/or such equipment standard performance requirements, climate factors, terrain, redundancy routes based on bit error rate performance requirements and/or capacity requirement. These control functions may be realised as automatic or manual or a combination via network management functions which includes SNMP adoption and IP communication capability between an external data network and the switch at any station and its connected WPs via IP protocols.
Multiple carriers as used in OFDM has several advantages allowing much higher robustness against multipath influence (delay spread) with relatively longer time lengths on high level modem methods in comparison to single carriers. It has however some drawbacks as the radio transceivers have to take into consideration peak powers which may occur instantly. Effective precautions to eliminate and/or minimise these peak power effects are included like Coded ODFM. Another advantage of using multi carriers in general via OFDM and/or Coded OFDM and/or generally other means is that less noise in its respective sub-channel occur than in a corresponding wider band single carrier channel. This is usable to bridge either longer hops or use correspondingly more complex modulation methods which would increase the potential transfer rate (on the same bit error rate quality) per channel on the same hop lengths.
In addition the invention includes means to arrange functionalities for stations to virtually act as central stations (base stations) and/or terminal stations corresponding to wireless access systems based on various equipment resource sharing and capacity sharing principles. Thus, network stations include means for virtually acting as one or multiple access solutions in P-MP and/or MP modes and/or transparent to radio link solutions with variable bandwidth requirements.
Systems implemented based on the invention would have the capability to complement typical existing and evolving solutions based on wire or fibre network in addition to compete or cope with other types of radio methods mentioned.
In the description the term wireless intends to include any kind of electromagnetic transmission through the air including transmission systems in radio frequency bands as well as light wave and/or laser technologies in suitable wavelengths for air transmission. There are several reasons for including light wave or laser communication, in spite of its hop length limitations under certain air conditions. One is because it has a narrower beam than a directed radio antenna, which leads to significantly less degradation effect by multipath reflections typical in radio transmission for high speed transfer. Laser has thus a potential possibility to support higher transmission channel speeds on each carrier. Speeds like 1000 Mbit/s or in fact higher speed, should such standards occur in connectionless communications, are possible. As an example these could be based on wavelength multiplexing technology. Laser communication does not typically require a licence. Risk of severe interference would normally not occur between stations.
Radio has its advantages and the invention enables a combination of the two transmission systems. The combination would allow communication of both radio and light-waves in parallel on the same routes and/or via different routes between stations, including laser transmission WPs that are backed by radio transmission WPs either to work in parallel or being used when required. This includes the possibility to use more than one route between stations and/or WPs for redundancy or other purposes like improved transfer capacity per connection or virtual IP based data flows through the system.
The invention provides for setting of transfer capacity via network management functions and/or possible automatic regulation of transfer capacity for the different types of real time and interactive transfer at the respective involved WPs. It includes further quality transfer settings between pairs of ports and defines possible selections of routes and other functions specifically mentioned for interacting and assigning transfer speed based on data derived from traffic at selected switches or switches for traffic requirement passing respective WPs. The invention provides a non-hierarchical wireless topology and internal switching capability within the network and it allow access between any two stations if air communication i.e. line of sight is possible. This is important as it saves spectrum and investments reduce equipment costs and speed up new infrastructure for broadband access requirement. This is different in comparison to standard wireless access system (in particular P-MP topologies) where terminal stations are not allowed to talk to each other. This is because they lack switching capability and the configuration itself. Further example is an MP access solution including systems using dynamic time sharing (TDMA) and space sharing mechanisms (SDMA). Its terminal and/or repeating stations are required to take the clock from a master clock station above resulting in a hierarchy unable to transfer data between such repeaters. This is because in the TDMA solution the central needs to synchronise the underlying terminals and control when the respective terminal shall communicate to the central (i.e. which time slots) so that the central station can have its antenna directed at the proper direction at the right time.
Summary of the invention
The present invention provides a station for wireless switching and communication comprising: at least one wireless port (WP) for wireless communication with another station; at least one port (UP/TP) for communication with a user or a network; and an internal switching unit for switching (routing) traffic between stations and/or ports.
Preferably, the wireless port has a controllable bandwidth e.g. by means of an OFDM modem, wherein the bandwidth utilised by the modem is controlled by varying the number of subchannels used, varying the modulation level, varying the transmission power, and/or varying the error correction.
Also, the wireless port may be capable of emulating various wireless standards and protocols and resource sharing schemes such as FDMA, TDMA, CDMA or combinations of them.
In a preferred embodiment, the station further comprises a network management port (NMP) for communication with an external network management unit.
Preferably the switching unit is adapted both to connectionless and circuit-oriented switching and conversion therebetween, wherein the connectionless switching is based on packet switching and/or IP protocols, and the circuit-oriented switching is based on ATM. The present invention is also directed to a network for wireless switching and communication comprising a number of stations of the above type, further comprising a network management unit capable of adding and deleting stations in the network.
In one network some stations are capable of functioning as repeating and terminal stations.
In a further network an external switching unit is provided for controlling the internal switching units of the stations. Preferably the external switching unit is adapted to set up alternative routes between stations.
In a further network complementary parallel routes are set up between pairs of stations. One complementary parallel route may be a radio channel, e.g. low bandwidth microwave, and the other complementary parallel route may be a high bandwidth laser channel.
In a further network some stations are capable of establishing point to multipoint communication. A wireless port may be adapted to work as a central for other wireless ports, sharing its capacity with a number of underlying wireless ports, such underlying wireless ports being able to commonly share its capacity with the central wireless port. A wireless port, which is sharing its capacity with other stations, and working as an underlying wireless port to these other stations may adapted to share its transmission resource capacity with other stations as a central. A wireless port which is working as an underlying station towards a central may be adapted to work as an underlying wireless port to other central wireless ports.
In a further network, the network is capable of emulating generic access systems. A wireless port is adapted to be connected to one station and virtually work as a standard terminal to another manufacturer's base station.
The present invention is also directed to a port unit for wireless switching and communication for connection to a station of the above type. According to the invention, the port unit comprises a modem and a radio unit and is arranged to be controlled by a control program through the station to which it is connected.
Detailed description
The invention is described in detail in the attached appendix A and drawings. APPENDIX A
The W-SENS - approach selectively included to work in combination with the method. In the examples of possible
This invention describes a method for realisations into practical system establishing a new physical and logical implementations, a primer focus has been laid communications network and architecture on connectionless Ethernet and IP protocol based on adoption of wireless communication switching and/routing as it ideally combined and switching between ports. The network with the method. However the method, sub- solution could typically be implemented as a methods, etc. does not excludes use of other terrestrial network servicing multiple users at switching solutions like ATM etc. In addition scattered locations. However airborne conversion of transfer requirement of other locations of stations carried by various types of types of signals than the used switching aircraft's, balloons etc. and/or satellite based platform and/or is described. etc. variations is applicable should it be required. Methods used in fixed terrestrial communication systems including wireless
Background methods for transferring digital information for
This document is describing a method with data & telecommunication applications varies complementary methods, which makes it typically depending on transfer requirement. possible to offer digital broadband services by Synchronous, asynchronous, symmetric or of connecting users at multiple stations locations asymmetric transmission are typically arranged in an area. The network flexibility, capacity and in different ways. One method is to establish capabilities are capable to grow as the number fixed connections without bandwidth variation of station are expanding thanks to the for any uplink or down link direction as it is principles used on the contrary too earlier done with point - point radio links. These are methods and/or systems known. In fact it leads typically used for bit transparent continuous to a self-generating capability expansion the flows between applications regardless of traffic more the network is growing, here coned to demands. Wireless - Self-Expansion Network Switching, Another method is to arrange a wireless W-SENS. access structure (fixed and/or mobile applications) where a station (central/base) is
Stations include means for wireless connected to a high capacity backbone communication between station sites, including network for a number of geographically vary high capacity (typically in relation to traffic scattered telecommunications users wireless transferred capacity per station connection) terminals. The communication between fast switching function capability to switch and central/base and terminal stations operates in or route digital data between sites through pair TDMA, FDMA or CDMA or combinations of of ports arranged for selected transfer them. Spatial division (SDMA) may be capacity. Wireless transmission through each arranged by controlling antenna beams to point pair of ports through the air includes in directions of each communication conversion of digital information to be applied requirement. on one or more carriers. These carriers are up The Radio Link (RL) consisting of a direct line or down converted to suitable high frequency of site connection or multiple hops in a electro-magnetic carrier frequency from repeated chain and/or loops and/or branch including radio bands and/or above, including structure via multiplexing/de-multiplexing laser frequencies etc. arrangement.
We are mainly refereeing to fixed applications
The method implemented in systems leads to as we are focusing of a method here, which surprising advantages (in relation to previous shall be able to support very high bandwidth used wireless solutions) in terms of increased solution. However it does not prevent to use network capacity, flexibility and to a capability external mobile assess solutions and virtual that is in practice will raise with network creations of such systems to include into the complexity. The more stations the more new network as been demonstrated. station and the more air capacity is obtainable. The latter is for fixed applications often Potentially are any wireless topology though of refereed to fixed wireless access FWA or today applicable P-P, P-MP or MP (i.e. radio broadband versions (B-FWA) of it (in Europe is relay, wireless access etc.) to be included in a this type presently standardised by network based on the method etc. and it could ETSI/BRAN, HA or HL) or similar in the United also supersede these solutions. States are LMDS solutions or IEEE 802.11 or In this description is also shown a number of 803.16 mentioned. added methods which are considered Typical transmission applications could require which variable capacity demands for each balanced (equal capacity in both directions) but connection. In addition optionally are SDMA unbalanced (unequal capacity in up or down arranged by steerable (narrow) antenna beams link) communication is getting more and more applied in order to save spectrum, allow more used in particular in modern access. users, increase the transmission speed, Considering access systems, a central decrease influence of multi-path etc. wireless node is accessing users to another network (typically backbone) via wireless Nor does the communication solutions based terminals placed at or near the location of the on radio links offer integrated service users. In addition repeaters may be used to adaptable capacity, multiple path capability, or expand the coverage in cases where the increasing capabilities adaptive for multi-user central node do not radio optically are able to connection requirements etc. directly connect. Nor does these access solutions supports an all to all communication mode as in a mesh
Digital wireless media distribution system are network topology structure, or support the typically considered separate solutions from capacity typically offered via radio links to these mentioned solutions above in that they multiple users, or including network capability have been focused on operating in broadcast in is self. Neither does a combination of them. mode. I.e. these may be aimed to transmit huge information in the direction (unbalanced) No wireless method and/or system solution where multiple scattered users are located exists which both is effectively operational to (from a central node -downlink) and eventually offer backbone solutions to other systems, less information could be arranged in a return accesses to other switching platforms, channel (uplink), if such exists. switched connections between users in a Modern interactive communication like wireless system and/or, connections between Internet, WEB communication, including connected users in a wireless solution to speech, image transfers and possibly media applications outside of such system. With distribution requires more than only one-way backbone means here digital transmission solution. Further bandwidth requirement may connection capacities means from few Mbit/s vary in time and direction, which should be (like E1/T1 , E2/T2, E3/T3, 10 Mbit/s) up to at handled properly in order to make it possible to least 100 Mbit/s, 25, 52, 155 Mbit/s (STM-1 utilise spectrum effectively and improve the SDH ATM or SONET transfer capacities). In traffic transfers on invested infrastructure. fact transfer rates towards and including 1000 Mbit/s or multiples of it, may be applicable in
Various wireless access systems and solutions radio and/or laser transmission applications. have been implemented or proposed over the The high capacity transfer would typically be years in order to support multiple scattered depending on multiple direction of point - point users in an area. These access design transfer transmission method and modem used approaches have been designed so that the etc. wireless accesses where meant to replace a Also so called connections can be indirectly wire etc. and connect users to a switching considered as access for many users groups, network that is different to the access system. a company connection etc. I.e. this is a similar situations as with the Thus supporting groups of users may include copper wire for telephony networks, RadioLan multiple applications and users ranging from a like IEEE 802.11 etc. for data networks access. simple voice to advance Internet and The user at the end have a simple radio entertainment films etc. requiring up to one terminal with do not need advanced Mbit s or more per individual user. Connecting functionality and the central or base station an apartment block could mean requirement of includes connection to switching and/or routing 100 Mbit/s or more. The method and system platforms. based on the methods concerned is applicable
In the radio access solutions is capacity and be able to support such connection services. means (radio etc.) of a central station shared Thus to use such system as a tool for by a group of terminals arranged in various operators, Internet service providers, corporate schemes, typically arranged in a star topology networks etc. or mobile operator including W- point-multipoint (P-MP) nut also more complex CDMA base station transmission. The support topologies are shown. This includes sharing in of transfer and/or access and/or connection time, frequency and codes TDMA, FDMA, should at least be such that the use via the CDMA or combinations thereof in order to method and sub-methods and suggested share common equipment and radio systems described here is supposed to include transmission capacity among multiple users, the offer of capacities, which realistically and effectively support multiple users specifically in only be usable for transparent connections a city or sub-urban environment. This bearing through the system or used as an access in mind the emerging network capacity in next network, it would in addition effectively be generation networks like Fast Ethernet, Gigabit capable of serving users connected with Ethernet, and other coming generation of connectivity within such system. Thus connectionless type of networks standards and functions including backbone (switching and for connection oriented ATM, DTM switching transmission) facilities offered to other and transmission. solutions (example wireless access solution), access type of solutions (transparent pipes
The method and sub-method including ability through) for other systems, connections and to various routing alternatives in order to internal switching between users located at improve transfer capacity in a network any station. implemented, gain improved frequency re-use capability, gain security etc. The use of packet data oriented The method is shown realised into systems connectionless switching capability at each based on fast connectionless type of switching station is shown typically closely integrated as it is exemplified in this document. with wireless transmission facilities (as This type of switching function is shown to wireless ports, examples fig 1 ,2,3,4,5,6, 16, include adaptive wireless communication 17a, 17b, 18... 33 etc.). It includes potentially means between selected pair of ports. The offering of integrated switching services for packet oriented transmission services including switching WPs but also local switching in control of various Internet Protocols (IP) based combination including transfers between UPs solutions would thus meant to be supported. on other stations wirelessly connected via This include means to support of interactive WPs. Thus, virtually offer as a switch/router busted data traffic exemplified by TCP/IP function for local and/or remote protocol or similar. Additionally means to communications requirements. Similar handle IP based real time synchronous or functions from additional network platform seamless synchronism or near real-time IP extended are applicable and/or possible to protocols in order to support continuous integrate between other switches/routers as streams of data typically required for voice shown in fig.16, 17 and 18. This examples and/or image transfer through such wireless shows how the method implemented could systems. effectively support the realisation of a wireless
As generally exemplified in many of the network based both as standalone networks appended figures implementations based on and as extensions and effectively integration such switching and wireless network topology with other for example already existing is applicable for principally all kind of service networks, fig 18. Where integration is requirement and any network topology could performed via logical communication added for be supported. I.e. a station is considered the purpose. In the figures, examples and combined with at least one high capacity further description are shown for switch function with comprehensive switching demonstration purposes the implementation of and/or routing functionality's between User the method and methods mainly related a Ports (UPs) and Wireless Ports (WPs). A WP connection less type of switching system contains at least one wireless receiver and platform. However ATM switching may have transmitter and modulator demodulator and some advantages to use in regard to transfer means to optimise transfer rate, quality etc. surely synchronous data but would requires between WPs. better clocking etc. than packet switching.
Means are included for co-ordination of physical bandwidth to optimise frequency reTo create access, backbone and connections use, organise communication between each for various connectionless type of switched pair of WPs and Ups, Further to organise the traffic seamless continuous streams of data sum of pair of WPs to achieve appropriate typically for telecommunications trunks etc. quality, transfer capacity in total an any area leads to difficulties or design considerations. where such system is implemented. Such The disadvantage with standard packet data means include selective adoption of more than protocols to fully and absolutely securely one sub-carrier, variations capability selection transparency transfer information without of transmission speed on sub-carriers or subloosing data is to be weighted against the channels. The method and sub-methods could flexibility connectionless switching. A method than effectively be implemented as a new type and means to secure such synchronous data of comprehensive wireless network system transfer is to assign transfer bandwidth through serving multiple users in an area. It would not the air between the respective WPs to get enough assurance of not loosing data, us real It includes assign of all or part of the traffic in time type of IP protocols use of priorities for such network or to be logically combined with such traffic etc by the IP protocols external switching platform (example fig 18) at any location or to multiple external switching
No other system or method exist for combining platforms at different station locations wireless and/or wired connect between No method exists where it effectively includes switches that support comprehensively a possibility to create any type of wireless geographical communication multi - point network topology like P-P, P-MP, MP-MP at services at multiple geographical locations I e the same time being able to effectively forming multiple The implementation of the method as locations service platform nodes containing described based on fast switches includes the access, backbone and internal traffic capability possibility to establish principally unrestricted wirelessly Local traffic may by switched communications network topologies because optionally in addition via a switch function the design of the switching function are such principally available at all locations where a that a neglected time delay loss is achievable station is located, example 2 at fig 4 or 2' or 2" using fast connectionless switch platforms like at fig 16 Thus, multiple services similar to CXe-16 Further means to a connectionless what is possible via standard switching/routing approach includes that scattered stations platforms is effectively obtainable by arranging principally "all stations" placed a locations that communication between the stations (10, or "sees" each other electro-magnetically is able 10', 11 , or 11 ' etc 12 fig 1 ,2, 18 etc ) Further to transfer data via corresponding WPs provided the physical implementation of a equipped for radio or laser, light-wave No station with the mentioned capabilities specific requirement for absolute time switching functions, transmission synchronisation such as for TDMA access arrangements etc are that it could be solutions is required This results in a solution comparable in size and/or cost to typical that offers significant flexibility where any new wireless access solution based on TDMA, station creates a new possibility to address FDMA, CDMA etc as highly integrated ASICs other stations In addition it leads to an designs are feasible for generally any digital inherent increased network capacity capability solution regardless performance In addition and increase improve routing possibilities, see means for point - multipoint (P-MP) also figure 25 a, b, c This further improves the arrangements for the transmission pipes possibilities to re-use frequency spectrum between WPs that do not require utilising full more efficient when directed antenna beams capacity in point - point (P-P) mode is are being used for communication between applicable The method and sub-methods wireless ports, examples fig 1a and b include that traffic between stations it I e due to the separation in elevations of switched/routed effectively between the beams is space and frequency resource wireless ports and the user or terminal ports sharing implied in the area It includes means based on the route needed, bandwidth for bandwidth adjustments, transmit power availability, terrain and line of sight situation, regulation etc to improve it further redundant routing for security and/or capacity etc This is exemplified for connectionless No method exists for stations in platform where multiple stations at various communications networks, equipped with locations contains a high speed fast switching switching functionality and one or more connectionless switch This switch in it self adopted ports for wireless communication could be seen as a backbone switch for a (Wreless Port, WP) where each such port traditional wireless access or other networks If communication with at least one other such each such switch is able to transport data WP at any corresponding station it between the other distributed switches in the communicates with No method exists where order of Mbit s or better Gigabit s capacities it such high capacity wireless multipoint would lead to the creation of comprehensive communication services are obtainable, where and powerful network Data is switched routed use of such multiple paths is possible to dropped inserted at any place where a station establish The solution to use scattered occur In addition each new station inherently switches and multiple wireless port and adopt increases the total wireless capacity and directed electromagnetic beams between increase routing capability and in fact potential these wireless ports and varies bandwidth and re-use efficiency in an area modulation complexity, error correction etc These types system solutions are generally The method could be implemented into various coned to Wireless W-Self Expansion Network systems and configurations using either packet Switching (W-SENS) types of switching and/routing including Internet Protocol (IP) connectionless based GSM systems are about 90 ms delays switching and routing at each station or occurring. The WPs include modem, signalling Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) type of processing units and electronics and functions circuit or cell oriented or connection types of to arrange appropriate air protocols, switching or other switching methods. standardised or proprietary. If transmission The method and other methods related is in functions and switching functions etc. (see this more detailed system implementation figure 33) are realised in highly integrated examples in this description is mainly electronic devices in ASICs, FPGAs, DSPs, concentration on the implementations including MMICs combined if necessary with discrete combined use of switches and/or routers radio components filters etc. it could be typically implemented capable of handling data arranged and mounted directly at the back of flows between such as Ethernet, Fast Ethernet an radio antenna and take very little space. In and Gigabit Ethernet ports connected. The volumes could the cost of such physical units high speed switch functions (Fast and Giga) be marginal, as any other commercial could be considered fast switches capable of electronic item. The stations are further keeping the switching time low and relatively arranged so that the full use the transmission constant in order to support streams through capacity of a each pair of one or multiple WPs each switch with neglected delay in order to could be used, instead of sharing radio effectively transfer seamless synchronous channel capacity (and radio head) as in the transmissions transparently through multiple case with traditional radio access TDMA, stations. These capabilities could typically be CDMA, FDMA. The W-SENS solution has needed to seamless transparently handle both further a benefit in comparison with the typical telecommunications flows of data traditional wireless access approach today through such system and typical burst where wireless terminals under a base stations interactive type of data effectively. An example is designed only for access when it have no of one of many possible implementations is to network intelligence, switching capabilities combine a switch function capable of handling which enable intelligent repeating capability. at least multiple fast Ethernet (but preferably for very high capacity capability Gigabit The method include a possibility to add a sub- Ethernet switches) port rates and assigned to it method where the share of a WPs radio one or a selected number of WPs. transmission units and radio channel by The highly competitive data & telecom market allowing resource-sharing methods like TDMA, leads to possible development highly FDMA and CDMA with or without SDMA integrated ASICs of low cost, or combinations arranged between WPs. of ASICs, FPGAs etc. specifically of digital I.e. a WP is in such case sharing its total electronics. capacity between more than one WP at
This would allow a low cost and feasible size different stations, exemplified in figure 3, 551 which allow implementation behind a window, and 17 a, b. on a wall, a roof top where the electronics is The design of a station including possible typically so small that it takes easily place implementation of added WPs in order to behind a radio antenna, laser transmitter expand area coverage, numbers of receiver or similar. connections, routing alternatives and capacity etc. Just as an example of an implementation,
Electronics for fast switching large volumes of it stations where equipped with a switch data fast is preferable highly integrated. There function of a capacity of up to about 10-16 are switches available at least as Gbit/s total switching capacity. If it where demonstrators today in chip formats which capable of handling at least a number of 30 x allows several Gbit/s of packets data (or ATM 100 and 8 x 1000 Mbit/s ports. cells) being switched or routed with a minimum of transmission delay (as an example < 1 Every new such station located in a certain microsecond which corresponds to 300 m area would be able to be expanded to 30-40 transmission delay through the air). Thus, fast directions at least. Every new such station switch functions based on highly integrated could in addition connect up to 30-40 new hardware which as an example is capable of stations. This leads to a tremendous increase transferring and switching multiples of 100 or of switching power and new alternatives. 1000 Mbit/s of data with no significant time Means to adopt such new topology and to use delay for a typical user even if many multiple the gained switching and/or routing capability switches are passed. Delays in the order of 4-5 and tools for re-arrange the network topology ms would as an example accepted for voice is applicable. I.e. change transmitted electro- communication without echo compensation. In magnetic power, change of routes, change of avoid interference and terminate to other transmission transfer capacity of WPs etc. backbone networks etc. The multiple ports usable WP and UP, TP at The switching and direction capacity mention every new station location (including above was only one of many possible integration with other switching networks at examples of figures. The power is further various locations, - see figure 17, 18) is demonstrated where each station limited to 4 gradually potentially increasing the actual WPs only. Scenery of a gradual capacity transfer capability in the air and on the implementation into such network is ground. demonstrated by fig. 22 a and b. I.e. number of possible stations superseding the level
Wireless communication into these exemplified mentioned 4°, 41, 42,43, 44, .. etc. stations. I.e. 30 new stations is able to take place > 256 stations using four levels where 4 WPs simultaneously. Narrow beams are applicable per station. in high radio frequency bands (via directed lobes) and via laser etc. Thus multiple The method described includes ability to directions could be served on overlapping establish communication between station in carrier frequencies from any station providing a the same network in various directions at the reasonable interference discrimination is same and/or different time on overlapping or applied in radio bands by the directed adjacent frequency spectrum using spatial antennas etc. Just as one example 1-2 separation by antennas and/or lasers. degrees on a main lobe (3 dB level) could No actuate timing and synchronisation allow simultaneous use of spectrum on an requirement being necessarily implemented as direction 3-4 degrees of the first etc. as proposed in earlier implementations using isolation would be 15 - 20 dB or similar. spatial separations for communication in multiple user environments. This is because pair of WP is establishing communication
Should frequency interference occur various principally irrespective of communication means for avoiding quality degradation is between other pair of WPs at the same applicable to the method. Like selection of stations or on other stations. separated frequency band, use alternative routes, variable modulation level, different Systems based on the method was coned W- coding etc, for the specific transfer. SENS as it is sensible new wireless network Each such station could service connection approach different in comparison to between up to 30 similar stations (without conventional Fixed Wireless Access, based on using conventional equipment resource TDMA, FDMA and CDMA with or without sharing mechanisms as used in conventional SDMA or with the radio link solution. However TDMA, FDMA, CDMA) solutions. it may include all these functions. Further every of the 30 scattered stations could W-SENS includes options means for virtual from their location serve 30 more and these 30 operating as multiple functions similar to P-P could serve another 30 etc. These example radio links by adoption of UPs and assignment shows that it could lead to a more or less of enough transfer capacity between involved unlimited number of possible stations and pair of WPs for a seamless bit and/or byte extreme high traffic transfer capacity via the air transparent transfer between UPs. In addition it in any geographical area like a city, sub-urban includes means to arrange functionality's for or rural environment. This on a limited stations to virtually function act as central spectrum as methods functions and means for station (base stations) and/or terminal stations increasingly efficient sharing of frequency corresponding to wireless access systems spectrum is achieved by the including of based on various equipment resource sharing beams direction, power regulation, modulation and capacity sharing principles. I.e. wireless level adoption, routing selection, improved access working according to TDMA, number of terminal points etc. (see fig. 25 and TDM/TDMA, FDMA, FDM/FDMA and CDMA, 22). including spatial separation or not (SDMA).
The stations would be scattered in an area Thus, in a W-SENS network stations include where pairs of WPs are isolated effectively means for virtually acting as one or multiple from other pairs of WPs in space by their access solutions in P-MP and/or MP modes position, transmission elevation and directed and/or transparent radio link solution, see antenna laser beams etc. The more stations figure 20, 21. the shorter the distance and the less The fact that it includes means for emulating transmission power required and the more these other functions, its own network possibilities to connect others or route traffic to functionality's, means to operate as backbone to other external access systems etc. (see fig. 4), leads to further significant advantages of The functional method and means the W-SENS approach in comparisons. implemented into systems W-SENS include The method and sub-methods include means means to support much higher bandwidth to to conform W-SENS to act as various existing multiple scattered users via air transmission and evolving wireless standards of solutions from any station in comparison to wireless mentioned in the areas mentioned above an in access mentioned. The method which include addition work on its own conditions in addition, possibility to combine distant wireless superseding the existing solutions. switching routing capability with local switching It includes means for internal operation in the between ports which may or may not be modes similar to radio links, laser links, TDMA, including wireless ports, see fig. 17 a, b and fig FDMA and CDMA including spatial 18. arrangements. I.e. mean to arranging selection of transmission capacity between switches via In the description is wireless means including WPs arranged in P-MP mode of operations any kind of electromagnetic transmission between WPs in FDMA, TDMA, CDMA through the air including transmission systems schemes or combinations with or without in radio frequency bands as well as laser spatial coverage by directed antenna beams, technologies in suitable wavelengths for air etc. transmission. A reason for including laser communication is several, in spite of its hop
Every new station added results in a possible length limitations under certain air conditions. increase of wireless switching capacity by One is because it has a narrower beam than a each such station. Each station connected in a directed radio antenna, which leads to W-SENS including wireless switching and/or significantly less degradation effect by routing capability is arranged with means to multipath reflections typical in radio arrange one or more additional connection by transmission for high speed transfer. Laser has adding WPs and establishes connections with thus a potential possibility to support higher other stations. Functional method and means transmission channel speeds like 1000 Mbit s to arrange communication selected transfer or in fact higher speed should such standards rates is included as sub-methods to the occur in connectionless communications. method. These sub-methods include selection Laser communication does not require a of variable transfer rate selection (speed) by licence, Risk of severe interfering would changing modem level and bandwidth normally not occur between stations. adoptions in addition in accordance to, transfer rate required, bandwidth available, transfer Radio has its advantages and the method quality performance needs etc. between each include sub-methods for combing the two pair of WPs and/or UPs and/or TPs. transmission systems. I.e. by including means to use the best from the two possibilities. Such
Systems implemented based on the methods added methods would allow communication of would have the capability to complement both radio and light-waves in parallel on the typical existing and evolving solutions based same routes and/or via different routes on wires or fibre network in addition to between station. A W-SENS implementation compete or cope with other types of radio includes laser transmission WPs that are methods mentioned. I.e. fixed standard P-P backed by radio transmission WPs either to radio links (including new p-p solutions like work in parallel or being used when required. WinNet, 100 Mbit/s links), laser links etc. This includes the possibility to use more than Examples of some broadband fixed wireless one route between stations and/or WPs for access solutions presently under redundancy or other purposes (see just one standardisation for interoperability capability example of many possible in fig 23). within ETSI/BRAN are HiperAccess, HiperLan, (and/or IEEE 802.11 , 802.16 etc. in US). WPs include possible use of fully transparent Other standards to cope with are ETSI TM4 speeds between switches and/or selectable co-existence standards for wireless access rates. I.e. station WPs may be interconnected and radio relays. There are a number of at fixed transmission rates, and other WPs products falling under this category today. based on variable rates. I.e. a WP based on Some examples are TSR 34, Siemens - laser frequencies could be chosen (to be WalkAir, SR 500, Netro, and other products of applied) for fixed capacity transfer capability wireless access type where radio channels and i.e. full 100 Mbit/s and/or 1000 Mbit/s capacity radio equipment are shared of a central because of the availability of frequency station. spectrum etc. In this way is also a totally full transparency between WPs achievable. The possibility of supporting various Methods functions and means for function is communication requirements at multiple included to let the different routes uses locations in an area locally and/or regionally is different types of WPs. One may be to utilise a crucial affair due to the high cost to establish variable capacity adjustments between pair of new in particular high capacity services and WPs (P-P) and another for fixed bandwidth the long time it would take to use cables fibre allocation between WPs. Additional are etc. methods functions and means included to The possibility to use of wireless networking handle fixed and variable capacity between means for multiple connections, accesses, WPs in P-P and/or P-MP mode, in time, at backbone, distribution, internal services, etc. selected frequencies and/or codes. Fixed an a comprehensive gradually expandable bandwidth could typically applied for laser network in any environment and to principally irrespective of variable traffic demand, as any end existing of foreseeable future user spectrum space is less critical in comparison to requirement is applicable by the use of W- radio frequency WPs. SENS, as exemplified.
Methods functions and means are applicable W-SENS could typically include methods for communication in W-SENS approaches functions and means at stations containing of where one or more WPs supporting very at least a switch function with a certain higher capacity transfer and other WPs capacity, at least one WP and optionally one adjusted for less capacity transfer or not used UP and /TP or more for traffic connections, if at all, at least as long as the corresponding required (if not repeating only). high capacity WP link(s) is performing well. W-SENS switching is applied based on packet Means are included to handle traffic situations switching including IP fast switching/routing in such a way as an eventual degradation capability or ATM switching. Using packet or IP could be virtually as invisible as possible to switching as an example include at least 10 connected users in time period when as an Mbit/s Ethernet or 100 Mbit/s Fast Ethernet example another link degrades severely. I.e. and/or higher speed ports (like Gigabit means to back up connections via alternative Ethernet and gradually other standards when WPs and/or via other routes (routes) is they occur) etc. would be closely associated applicable. As an example radio with corresponding WP connections applied. communication WPs that at least are including Thus, the switch function selected should at functions to be adjusted to various selectable least have the capacity to support these types transfer rates is applicable at selective time of port capacities and the ability to arrange fast being transferring higher rates if another switching between these multiple ports. alternative route is degraded. In addition Methods functions and means are included to adding of another route is applicable as an make it possible to use read logical data alternative or in addition, see fig. 25. Further protocols including IP to allowing transparent example, one port - port communication and/or seamless transparent continuos flow between two stations is connected via radio between WPs and between any ports in and another via laser. The laser could be communication. This includes ability to allocate based on constant allocation of the bandwidth transfer rates between WPs in correspondence for simplicity reason and cost effectiveness of at least the rate of such transfer. Including and more or less meet full transparency with means to detect real time requirement, set high speed communication port to port transfer rates in accordance, set priorities on between WPs. A further example between two data that shall be possible to transfer without stations is a laser connection, which typically ARQs, re-transmission etc. and/or apply work well in short ranges, with clear sky etc. bandwidth reservations and detect such over few km. A radio transmission connection reservations to allocate transfer rate in which is more insensitive to environment accordance. condition but which would have limited Method and means included to "secure" frequency bandwidth available in comparison transparent flow of bits (typically required for would be backing a laser if it degrades or the synchronous requirements) is in the two pair of WPs could work in parallel. The communication process between pair of WPs radio connection include means to adjust the are to secure that enough bandwidth or transmission capacity (bandwidth, modulation, transfer rate for actual real time transmission coding) to meet higher speed transmission requirements is applied. Further is means requirements under the time the (fixed) applied to prioritise such data traffic that typically laser transmission system is degraded require real transfer type of traffic requirement during rain, snow, fog air pollution etc. and assigning enough transfer rate for at least such data Data transfer requirement of data is possible to match with the actual possibilities with less priority as an example typical see fig 28 interactive burst type of data communication Example, if a transfer rates between two requirement, (only one example could be stations are applied with connectionless type of TCP/IP) The ability to set variable bandwidth switches If port is assigned corresponding to requirement and set up of transfer capacity in the standard capacity of 100 and/or 1000 either way down and up link is schematically Mbit/s dual direction communication and it is visualised in figure 12, 4001 , 3001 etc The considered the wireless connections (WPs) allocated flow in either direction between pair connecting the two sites are not able to of WPs is shown to be different and could allocate enough transfer capacity I e in this typically be less than would be possible as the case would less than 100 and/or 1000 Mbit/s traffic flow varies (which may be the case using radio over long hops)
I e methods functions and means are included If the actual capacity for at least for the to assure that the less critical data than real seamless transparent flow of data is set to be time data could use the remaining capacity set enough and the extra capacity above this is set available as extra capacity besides the between the WPs selectively in either direction capacity that is required for continuous be used for remain interactive traffic as transparent flow of bits of data Methods described earlier Methods functions and functions and means are available to select an means for setting of transfer capacity via appropriate average transfer rate based on an network management functions and/or accepted delay, possible rate to use, etc , for possible automatic regulation of transfer interactive data transfers for either direction capacity for the different types of real time and between each pair of WPs That includes interactive transfer is applicable at the methods functions and means to store data respective involved WPs under highly interactive periods when large The method of varying the transfer rate and chunks of data have to be transmitted and means for it if applied in to a system is further when the actual selected transfer rate for such is described in this document, see also figures data through any pair of WPs for the interactive 8, 14, 13, 11 data transmission is not enough Methods functions and means to store such data under The switch function implemented in a system such periods are applicable by assigning an could be of various size depending of the intermediate function of memory at a number ports, capacity of the ports We here selectable size This is schematically shown exemplified a type of switch only to simplify the applied, in fig 12 at 551/M and/or fig 5 at explanation The need for higher and higher 551 MUP Means to detect transfer delay, data capacity in the networks leads to a rapid overflow detection of such memory function is development of high-speed switching/routing included Thus, a method is included where a system Using as an example fibre connections selection of a variable size of a memory a standard and seamless unlimited capacity is function is optionally included Assigning of achievable in a point to point link for variable transfer rates for interactive data as connectionless switching based on IP well as variable store capacity for each pair of protocols and/similar and/or ATM switching (of WP in order to handle interactivity data cells, including the 48+5 bytes per cell) should transmission effectively The method and an such switches be used Considering wireless applied systems "pair of WP- links" (visualised radio communication transfer rates between in fig 12 4010, 3010) means to visualise the WPs in W-SENS is more limited than fibre possible vary of the transmission capacity Thus, in the examples given switching between pair of WPs in various ways (up-link capacities mentioned are fairly high today but and/or down-link) Further such capacity will not tomorrow particularly considering fibre as a include means to select transfer rates transmission medium depending on multiple factors, like hop distance, frequency band, W-SENS allows each pair of WPs in modulation/bandwidth per carrier channel, communication to correspond to traditional available radio power and/or laser power, radio links or superseding these as it includes capacity requirements including real time and means for multiple routings, adaptable interactive transfer considerations, level of bandwidth application, modulation level and a error correction, quality requirement, alternate possible sub-channel selection approach parallel routing, etc applied, etc
I e means including tools for setting of actual Thus W-SENS would be able to offer high transfer requirement through each pair of WPs capacity to many users in an area in comparison to the capacities from earlier use of it to include methods for re-arrange the wireless solutions. Comprehensive broadband routing between stations accordance. Thus, communications services offered to multiple means are included which allows taking locations are far beyond earlier wireless advantage of a new topology situation by resolutions. Considering in addition both radio arranging routes and adopting transfer and laser communications the capacities on capacity, power level etc. in accordance. This multiple ports may allow the use of ports added functional means include a topology utilising the full transparent port capacity design and set up network tool involve between different stations. operation via network management functions Thus, the exemplified capacity of 10-16 Gbit/s includes, capacity design tools, re-routing, map switch capacity seems of course high (it may and topology guidelines. be higher or less capacity) for wireless As stations principally could be arranged to purposes communications application today, in communicate in any direction or elevation with relation to the capacities that is available on other stations via applied WPs, antenna existing solutions. However, the meaning with systems or laser beams etc. The functional example is to show that W-SENS is applicable means include mechanisms of re-design where to such high capacity meaning it could be used any new station that occurs in an implemented as a powerful communication alternative for already available network based on the new local and regional infrastructures. method (and a realised system W-SENS). Radio based WPs include methods functions Functional means are included in a way that and means to control: various frequency such changes are possible to take advantage bandwidth controls by selection of number of of by change transmission directions of station allowed sub-channels, various total transfer, WPs to change from one station and its WP to selections of modulation level per carrier (see another station and its WP by changing also fig 8), transmitted power regulation, based antenna directions or controlling electronically on distance quality requirements, etc. transmission in new directions. Methods functions and means for spatial Re-routing is includes functional means direction control, area coverage, routing allowing control of transmission directions in arrangement and/or re-arrangement. Means in various directions (spatially) and/or elevations order to arrange selection of transfer rates by the possible control of different types of between WPs, which is supposed to be smaller antennas. Various types of directable spatial than capacity of a continuos flow of a carrier or antenna and/or laser beams are allowed to be sub-carriers is applicable by the possible included. Typically is one beam per WP-WP selection on time, fragment selection similar to connections applied. I.e. a number of fixed TDMA. antennas arranged to point in different directions and select the appropriate are
User ports, (UP) are exemplified in fig. 1 , 2, 3, applicable. Included are methods functions and 12, 17 a b and the numbers 100, 101 , 102 etc. means to control any of multiple horns Termination to other networks is mentioned arranged via reflected common sub-reflector to Terminal Ports, (TP), see fig 1 1000, 1021) create multiple directional antennas to be Communication between UPs, TP and UPs via connected to one or more WPs. multiple stations over a landscape, etc. is Included are also methods functions and principally interconnected via one or a multiple means using arrays of multiple horns and set of radio ports (WPs) connected. Meand for selecting the appropriate horn for a managing W-SENS approaches is visualised corresponding direction of another WP. via Network Management Ports (NMPs) Included are also functional means using applicable to stations. Network control or subphased array antennas with one or multiple network control, WP control, fig 16 10, 1071 beams applicable per pair of WP i.e. one beam ..10'N, 10" and fig. 18, 10.000, 9.000, NMS, is directed per pair of WPs, several WPs are NPM, NMP71 etc. considered to be able to be supported included on a common antenna platform (see also fig.
A pair or multiple WPs pairs are applicable d to 27). be equipped at stations. Any station includes means for communication with any other The possible control of selection of alternative station provided they optically see each other. directions by possible selection between As the number of stations and routes increase different pair of WPs means that systems increased the possible routes and transfer implement on the methods offer seamless capacity between stations is potentially similar services but at much higher possible increased etc. As an example if a new situation transfer rate etc. in comparison to traditional occur it could be of a great advantage to make wireless access. I.e. multiple scattered users served by W-SENS leads to several in fig 1 , where all stations are allowed to considerable improvements in comparison as communicate 10, 11 , 12) and they are freely higher transfer rates, free topology etc is related to each other User and/or terminal achieved Radio and radio channel capacity is ports are freely defined at any station not necessarily shared (among many stations and reduced in capacity) Further is advanced This is different in comparison to standard switching and/or routing possible and network wireless access system (in particular P-MP integration to other "backbone" network at any topologies) where terminal stations are not point The station could work as a backbone allowed to talk to each other This is because for an integrated access solution, see example they lack switching capability and the figure 24 where one WP is establishing a P-MP configuration itself Further example is a MP communication with other WPs at different access solutions including the use of dynamic stations time sharing (TDMA) and space sharing
The method of using multiple point - point mechanisms (SDMA), TSR 34 Its terminal communications between ports (via the air) and/or repeating stations required to take the and switch between them leads to a total clock from a master clock station above station capacity, which would be much higher resulting in a hierarchy unable data transfer than in conventional access approaches between such repeaters, examples from Additionally every switch functions added in a system like TSR 34 This is because the given area adds both the switching capacity in central needs to synchronise the underlying W-SENS it also potentially improve possible the terminals and control when the respective capacity transfer capacity terminal shall communicate to the central (i e which time slots) so that the central station can
Methods functions and means included for any have its antenna directed at the proper of the integrated switched functions (1 , 2, 3, direction at the right time etc schematically shown in figure drawings) include ability for external switch functions (fig No method and no system is shown in wireless 17 b 10" etc ) to work as integrated parts of networks where such free communication ("all- one or more W-SENS solutions separated in all") between any station is applicable Where various regions This include methods the meaning of central or terminal station is not functions and means for users connected applicable, where it is possible to establish under W-SENS to establish communication comprehensive multi users communication as with users connected under such other long as stations virtually "optically" sees each external switch and/or routing system and/or other with users connected at any another remote In order to adopt transfer between stations with located W-SENS solution Thus using an low speed communication requirements external switching/routing network within between ports and/or to virtually include between, which is generally visualised in figure standardised solutions are method and 16 function and means included to adopt to
Method functions means included at stations to various resource sharing schemes used by work as a backbone switch function for any wireless access solution and its standards user connected anywhere in a topology It It includes possible adoptions on stations to includes ability to connect other wireless available standards or evolving standards etc access systems central and/or base station to by European and/or US and/or Japanese one of the stations switch functions and uses standards any other institute Like ETSI/TM 4 such access systems remote stations as (BRAN, HA, HL) or IEEE etc Virtual realisation transparent extensions to scattered locations of multiple functions of these standards are which traffic is switched within a selected W- considered applicable and being potentially SENS station, see also figure 4 possible to operate in parallel to W-SENS method and its methods functions and means
Method functions and means are included to implementations This is applicable by establish a non-hierarchical wireless topology adopting actual specific WPs and associated of stations This include "all - all" user and/or terminal ports to conform to these communication as long as stations virtually standards I e should as an example a optically sees each other and are within specific air protocol exist for a specific appropriate distance on a appropriate standard required to be applied means to frequency, transmit power etc regardless of adopt to it for the communication via respective topology, I e the meaning central station or WP would be applied for this specific terminal station etc as in conventional access communication See also figure 20 and 21 networks is not applied One example is given Realisation include specifically designed WPs quality etc. Concerning transparent for the purpose which would be virtually acting communication of synchronous transfer as a central station and multiple requirements through when connectionless correspondingly specifically designed WPs switching functions are applied at least as near would virtually as terminals (see example as transparent communication as possible is figure 20, 21 , 24). These functions are partly applied. Considering both synchronous and realised by arranging multiple P-MP modes of asynchronous data is required. It includes that operation to be applied between WPs. Thus P- selection of enough transfer capacity is applied MP mode of communication include functions for synchronous data between involved pair of for the purpose of emulating wireless access WPs. It includes secondly at least selection of structures and/or for allow for reduced and additional transfer capacity to be transferred shared transmission capacity radio channels transparent or as near as transparent etc. between W-SENS stations switching communication as possible based is on is functions. specific traffic requirement, bit error rate
Methods functions and means for arranging quality, delay performance, bandwidth communication between stations operating in availability etc. multiple P-P modes and/or multiple P-MP Considering connectionless switching functions mode on the same stations in addition is used selection will principally be made to included to create multi system operational allocate transfer capacity's between pair of functions virtually simultaneously in parallel. WPs up to at least 10 and/or 100 and/or up to or towards 1000 Mbit s. Using radio frequency
Method system and means are included for the carriers imply a higher interest in adopting the possible use of directional and/or sector and/or transfer capacity to actual requirement which omni directional antenna systems and/or laser often may be less than a full and constant beams. Including method function and means assignment of 100 Mbit s (fast Ethernet) to electronically control beams in direction etc. capacity between a pair of WPs. Using laser Including capability to control more than one beams on short hops and connecting such antenna beam to be steered and/or selected WPs with full transparent capacity could be simultaneously each beam in its specific considered more applicable. direction. This includes serving one and/or Radio communication via radio links are multiple WP operating in P-P mode and/or beginning to reach 400-600 Mbit/s WPs operating in P-MP modes. Such methods commercially. functions and means are applicable to W- One of the problems for high transfer rate SENS solutions. Method function and means radios is to utilise spectrum effectively thus to design and set up functions of WP is needing to use complex modulation methods included. The set up of respective WPs which would be require several error function, its associated ports, its antenna correction, equalisation coursed by delay arrangements, method of communication spread, etc. Method functions and means are capacity etc, etc. is included and being included to overcome to problem of individual accessible via network management functions bandwidth selection, transfer capacity, transfer virtually from any station. quality, hop length limitations, the need of The method function and means includes complex equalisation and/or the constant us of besides a separate design of WPs working as a complex modulation method etc. In W-SENS central or terminals, WP design includes a are included ability to use one and/or more possible virtual function to be set to emulate a carriers each modulated separately and central and/or terminal function based on setcarrying its oven data. up functions via network management or Method function and means are included to similar. assign a selected number of sub-channels
Method function and means to make it possible (and/or sub-carriers) to gradual select the to change radio network topology without transfer capacity and bandwidth between each necessarily physically have to re-direct a fixed pair of ports. It includes possible selection of antenna, re-configure communication between modulation level, error correction per subports is included. This is possible by the channel, radio (or laser if needed) power possible control of antenna beams etc. into regulation in relation to hop lengths climate new directions and/or to add new beams. factors, terrain, redundancy routes based on bit error rate performance requirements.
Method function and means are included for A narrower radio channel has the advantage of arranging communication between WPs having each less noise in its respective transparently to specific service requirement, channel than a corresponding wider channel. i.e. including transfer rate, delay, bit error rate This is usable in either longer hops or correspondingly more complex modulation Communication between stations through the methods, which would increasing the potential air routed via the built in switch/switches by transfer rate (on the same bit error rate quality) switching data between pair of ports (WPs) up per channel on the same hop lengths to full capacity or with reduced capacity based Methods functions and means are included to on needs, possibilities etc Communication select sub-channels to be used, balance between WPs include possible adjustments of factors of quality and modulation level, select transmit capacity, requirement, frequency, appropriate transfer rates on sub-channels, frequency bandwidth, distances, directional select error correction etc antenna beams or laser beam for each pair of WPs if applied to being able to achieve spatial
The method results in possibilities to gradually division expand transfer capacity between WPs in fact up to the maximum capacity of the ports used to connect the WPs from the switching A method functions means including function A today seemingly high capacity possibilities to assign communication between transfer requirement of 1000 Mbit/s capacity UP, TPs and principally transparently assign between Gigabit Ethernet could be applicable transfer between pair of WPs through two or via radio by the use of this method more station in order to flow digital data for Gradual expansion of transfer rates would be principally any requirements as long it conform applicable even if the transfer between any two to bandwidth availability and required quality It WPs that have the ability to transparently includes functions for repeat, drop, insert, communication via 1000 Mbit/s ports is not terminate (to other backbone network) and reached I e communication performance is switch traffic at any station in an all to all defined by the channel bandwidth, number of configurations channels applied, modulation method, coding (like CRC - FEC or similar), distance, RF power, environment, frequency band etc Stations are included with method function and Summary method, sub-methods etc. means to make it possible to create network and/or routing functionality This to at least a
The method for a wireless network offering level where traffic is switched and/or routed via communications services at many locations selected WPs and expandable to include user locally, regionally It is based on stations ports and or terminal ports and or use of including switching function, one or more ports additional external network switches routers for wireless communication (WP), optional etc ports for termination and or connect users (TP/UP) Wireless communication between station in any given area is established via pair A method function and means including use of of WP in communication, arranged for P-P ATM and/or connectionless switches When and/or P-MP arrangements At least for connectionless switching are applied various connectionless switching are traffic directed in existing and future IP and/or similar protocols alternative selected directions between WP via for packet data is applicable for handling stations switch functions The combination of transparent synchronous and/or asynchronous powerful switching capability tailored selection transfer through each pair of WPs including of WP for wireless communication between ability to handle traffic entering from various station leads to surprising results in routes comparison to previous wired and/or wireless solution for servicing multiple users in a local end/or regional environment In fact it leads to Method function and means for a "self expanded network capacity" including electromagnetic communication between WPs increasing optional routing alternatives Including ability to transparently assign Implemented in a system it is coned Wireless capability between up to or towards a full rate Self-Expansion Network Switching, W-SENS of 10 or 100 or 1000 Mbit s (or other capacities solution should they be standardised)
By applying a required number and types of WPs based on the method and sub-methods include the potential capability to establish any Method function and means at least for radio type of network topology used or superseding transmission between pair of WPs in these, any type of function, including all to all communication Including functions to assign station typology, etc digital transmission capacity in either direction at selective transfer rates principally up to the full capacity of each pair of ports assigned to connect the respective switch function at each side via the air Means to assign transfer Method functions and means are included capacity includes optimise of quality transparent communication capacity between requirement in relation to bandwidth and WPs by using the full capacity of switch to transfer rates WPs and between WPs equipped without
Control of all or any of following functions are means to regulate transfer speed at WPs for included radio transmitter power level control, traffic between any two switching function modulation type or modulation level control, including at last WPs for laser communication level of fault error correction, antenna gain, antenna direction, frequency bandwidth by 10 selection of number of sub carriers, antenna Method function and means including control polarisation control Dual polarisation i e cross of transmission capacity by the use of polarisation transfer adoptions when applied modulation level control, selection of bandwidth by selecting required number of sub-carriers (FDM)
A method function means included to arrange routing alternatives including re-arrange 1 1 routing To allow use of frequency spectrum Method functions and means to combine efficient, gradual increased transfer capacity in various routing alternatives Including denser topologies, decrease the average hop combined use of route based on different distance by reduce transmitted power or electromagnetic frequencies as carriers increase the modulation level and the possible including use of various transfer capacity per speed I e includes mechanisms to change route and/or WPs taking part in transmission, any established pair WP in network which including laser combined radio, including "high" changes with new stations added or deleted speed communication and parallel or including the ability to set up of new pair of redundant lower speed route connections and/or change speed performance or change routing in accordance 12 Method functions and means are in such cases Method functions and means including the included to handle re-direction of antenna possible implementation of WPs with the beams etc in accordance to changes capability to create communication with The same type of basic physical hardware multiple other WPs at different stations and means could be used as one or several creating point to multipoint transfer topologies modules at multiple stations see some between WPs and switches This includes examples in the figure 5, 33, 34 The number Equipment resource sharing of radio and and types of WPs including antenna modem by splicing capacity at one WP to more arrangements, UPs, TPs are tailored at each than one other WP (one example in fig 6 570) station according to demand Means for Equipment resource share by common use of manual assignment and/or automatic detection radio head inclusive modem and with selective of configuration is included and actual situation use of capacity by assigning required number is stored in an applied NMP database of sub-channels to more than one specific WPs
(underneath), FDMA
8 Equipment resource sharing in time segments
Method function and means to include use by including common use of selective antenna solutions to include achievement of bandwidth allocation i e selective number of effective spatial division adaptable to be sub-channels to be used constantly traditional possible to organise in different directions TDMA including alternative to select bandwidth (elevations) manually or electronically to for communication at each specific time optimise quality and minimised influence from segment (FDMA/TDMA) multi-path reflections, interference from Equipment resource sharing including the overlapping frequencies etc Means are above plus modulation level control, error included to control of antenna beams to point corrections in different directions to adopt the network Equipment resource sharing by common use changes and different routing alternatives of antennas arranged for spatial when fixed beam antennas are utilised communication Multiple fixed beam antennas and/or common Equipment resource sharing including modem reflector antennas are to be used including uses selective coding of sub-channels controlled in direction for each pair WPs set in (CDMA), assignment, de-assignments connection capability or multiples of possible pre-set plans and/or
13 initiated by bit error rates recorded per pair of
Method functions and means including the WP These means include settings via network possibility to assign WPs at stations where any management control function terminal such WP have the capability as a central (example 200, 210) function establishing radio communication with more than one other WP(s) These WPs being 16 based at variable locations all radio optically Method and means including assignment of reachable from such central WP The transfer capacity based on the detected communication transmission capacity includes requirement for transparent communication, being at least based on frequency division versus burst data communication This include where the communication transmission ability to detect transparent transmit resource of a central WP is shareable with requirement at respective WPs, detection of multiple other WPs in order to satisfy the real time protocols based on IP, detecting of respective communications capacity demand priority level on IP protocol and/or any other between the respective scattered WPs and a bandwidth reservation scheme on IP or WP To achieve selective transmission signalled by cells by ATM switches if these are capacity it includes possible selective portion used of any or selective parts of the following Including ability to assign bandwidth at potentially functionality's, frequency appropriate quality for possible transfer of bandwidths in Hz for carrier or sub-carriers to synchronous flow through WPs according to be defied for the various links in such P-MP quality demands in standard data & configuration, further including possible telecommunications applications selection of modulation level like QPSK, 16 Including means for the ability to assign QAM 64 QAM, 128, 266 QAM (or other) etc appropriate bandwidth between WPs for on carriers and sub-carriers, number or groups asynchronous data and/or less prioritised of sub-carriers when FDM and/or OFDM type reservations by using intermediate storing of of modulation method used, individual packets in memories when under time when transmission performance for every hop the bandwidth is not enough etc include regulation of radio transmitted power, control of antennas spatial direction for the 18 selective routes Sector or omni-directional Method functions and means including antennas to cover all scattered WPs or part of connectionless switch functions at station them under any central WP is applicable It is included specifically when data needs to be 19 broad-caste from one source to many, see Method functions and means of at least figure 5 583 connectionless switches to include fast switching and/or routing performance
14 Including means for switching between ports
Method functions and means including that with about one or a few microseconds (this is switching function at any station is usable as considered fast and adding little extra delay as backbone switch Including the possibility to be 1 us corresponding to about 300 m used as a backbone switch for any external propagation time in air) wireless system and/or internal virtually I e seamless transparent flow could be created wireless access solution, see figure 4 obtained through such station with limited extra (a,b) or figure 20 delays added per station As an example one ms or more could be considered long in some
15 applications (corresponding to about 300 km
Method functions and means include capability propagation) if multiple switches were involved to shift between carrier frequencies of any of in a connection Telecommunications type of the multiples or multiple sub-carriers carriers services in particular is sensitive seamless real used for communications between pairs of time performance requirements but also WPs traditional data communication throughput
This include possible control of the frequencies performance due to delays to principally fixed position typically in a licensed situation and/or including schemes of 20 frequencies to jump between applicable to Method functions and means include unlicensed application Additionally it include possibilities to use any of multiple ports for p-p means for other schemes like frequencies WPs into variable spatial directions for shifted at regular time intervals according one communication between stations Selectable number of WPs includes ability to every station. Including allow multiple stations establish communications via selectable to be included of each connection between antennas and beam direction. Included are users or user and/or terminal ports. Including means to: means for clocking out data transferred to a
■ Arrange any of multiple of radio heads to station to a defined port at seamless be assigned to selected fixed antenna lobe synchronous if it is required. Means for directions clocking out received and stored data at
■ Ability to use any of more a pre-set of defined rates and specifications according to antennas lobe direction. standards like ITU-T including jitter and/or
■ Use more than one "narrow" beam and wanderer specifications is included by control each to point beams in various appropriate selection of local clocks at stations, selected directions and the use of one which clocks out such data. Thus no time radio head per lobe. synchronism needs to be transferred trough
■ Directed antennas, re-directed antennas, the network. Effects of small time delay multiple directed antennas. variations between different connections depending of the number of station passed etc.
Including means for using antennas which is could than be ignored. Communications like covering an area of a sector, multiple sectors, synchronous leased lines and or distributions omni-directional etc. "for near distance services from telephony, video-conferencing, distribution" to distribute to many scattered Internet communications, media distribution etc stations and its respective WPs. is thus applicable.
21 24
Method functions and means including ability Method functions and means including system at any place, any station, from any station which switch functions at station include to the establish virtually any type of wireless network capacity to handle the sum or the capacity of including one or multiples of network the a number of ports WPs, UPs, TPs, OPs of topologies or combinations if principally optical various rates (fig. 16, 17, 18 100, 100', 110, line of site occurs. Earlier wireless access of 210, 210' etc.), of each station. The number of station topology structures is superseded. WPs shall be possible to expand at each station in order to allow a gradual increasing
22 number of communication directions, and
Method functions and means including ability capacities etc. with other stations. to measure quality of data transferred between WPs, including measure of loss of data, 25 overflow on specific links (memories) of WPs Method functions and means including at least and report such data. one switch function per station, which digitally
It includes mechanism to assign capacity in establishing connection of traffic to different accordance to requirement manually and/or set direction between scattered stations. of transfer capacity automatically accorded to As an example only consider a sizeof a switchi detected information on applied data to WPs. function to: Included are functions for such measures and A few (four) WPs could be connected for a reports of such information is detectable at any maximum rate of 1 Gbit/s duplex station. communication (into two directions)
This including ability to adjust and set up at an A 20- 30 applicable for maximum 100 Mbit s appropriate transfer capacity through the air, duplex capacity (i.e. consider 30 directions). via pairs of WPs via operator terminals, like This would require a switching capacity of at NMS/NMP/NMP' etc. based on SNMP and/or least around 8 Gbit s for the WPs only. added functions to SNMP and/or similar This is just one example of a station capacity network management protocols. much smaller capacity or larger capacity would be applicable. Also gradual expansion of
23 switching capacity is applicable as scheduled
Method functions and means including ability in fig. 31. to let data be transferred between any WPs at any station through a used connectionless 26 switching functions fast and transparent Method functions and means to include through such station with time delay which possibility to geographically scatter the stations could be considered neglected. Including if randomly include typically narrow beam transferee goes through multiple's of stations antennas pointing to respective required WPs each with similar addition delay coursed by in order to arrange communication. Including the possibility to connect a number of overlapping frequencies are avoided in the connections possible and reach multiple same transmission directions among location and in this way create a multi stations. connection network for many scattered users to select different frequencies to avoid at alternative points and directions. The result frequency overlapping and thus by this is that an extremely efficient utilisation interference in directions and time which is of frequency spectrum would be applicable, in in addition possible to complement and as frequency use is getting more and more combine with an appropriate resource randomly scattered in elevation and space with sharing by using spacing and alternative increasing user density. I.e. communication is routing as generally described above. getting relatively better and better isolated horizontally, vertically and by obstacles with discriminating antenna beam angles by the shortening of hops, this allow further to even better efficient use of spectrum. Additionally Further description of methods functions are means for possible increase of transfer and systems end means routing capability applicable in denser W- SENS networks which also improve the Figures spectrum efficiency, see also fig 25. In addition this allows also a network to be built Figure 1 a and b up gradually from a user to a user and to Station topologies in vertical, horizontal space access users around the corners. In addition view. means for terminating traffic to new point As an example to a fibre backbone) is applicable Figure 2 when network is expanding which improves Vision of stations means and communications possibilities to offloading the traffic though the via wireless ports, user ports, terminal ports. air which in turn improves spectrum further. Means of using beam antennas or sector Figure 3 antennas to include that one WP can establish Vision of stations in point-point communication communication at the same time at different inclusive point-multipoint. directions is applicable when required. Methods functions and means for: Figure 4
■ sharing of spectrum by placing out stations Vision of various application, termination and in space and using pointing beam application examples of external wireless antennas for the communicating between solution. the respective WPs.
« for single carriers and/or means for multi- Figure 5 carrier including use of frequency division Examples of structure and means are shown in modulation (FDM) and/or Octagonal, a wireless port and antenna solutions, splicing OFDM frequency division modulation. of a wireless port, into sub-wireless ports.
■ for selective rate adoption adoptions on carrier and/or sub-carrier, appropriate Figure 6 forward error correction, FEC, Additional examples of structures and means
■ adjustable to various levels of errors and for a wireless port are shown, inclusive an types of errors depending on error example of splitting of modem capacity and performance detected, grouping sub-carriers via filter banks.
■ modulation level selected per channel, received radio frequency (rf)-level etc. Figure 7 a,b,c,d. transmission power level regulation Visualising an example allocation of carriers in adoptions included means in order to different time for different bandwidth compensate for variation of distances at requirements. In addition a general idea of a time of re-arranging, various modulation buffert memory to handle interactive traffic. levels,
■ various frequency band attenuation. Figure 8 a,b,c.
■ automatic gain control (AGC) at the Generally vision of a frequency spectrum of receiving channels at each rf-receiver at sub-carriers, grouping of sub-carriers, splicing each WP of modem capacity for the operation into more
■ selection of appropriate bearer frequency than one radio head (sub-wireless port). and number off bearers to being able to handle interference risk to prevent that Figure 9 General demonstration of various regular frequency shift, possible TDM and or communications services possible to use a W- TDMA structure etc. SENS network.
Figure 20
Figure 10 a,b. Show an example of a possible emulation of a
Shown some possible examples of stations wireless access system originated from a vision of type of physical implementation wireless port and its use of the W-SENS structure of stations. switching capacity and/or external switching.
Figure 11 a,b,c. Figure 21
Examples of some possible serial to parallel Are generally vision possible adoptions to conversion of incoming data to a wireless port various co-existence, interoperability to a parallel application when more than one standards, etc. in combination with various carrier is used. proprietary air interfaces etc.
Figure 12 Figure 22 a, b.
Vision of selection of various transfer capacity The figures demonstrate that complex network allocations between stations via wireless ports, structures (shortened hops, increasing routing up to a certain full capacity between each pair alternatives etc.) serving many is possible to of wireless ports. gradually evolve into originated from very simple structures and gradual increase of
Figure 13 different termination points.
Examples of use of various modulation scheme between different stations, including Figure 23 an example of an alternative parallel route for Gives an example of combination of high part of traffic. speed transfer using laser applications and radio solutions typically with less capacity in
Figure 14 parallel and/or as a backup.
Example of incoming traffic to a station via the air from two different stations which are both Figure 24 added and transferred via a common wireless Shows an example of an implementation port to a forth station. where W-SENS is combined wit a fibre backbone, termination is shown to be able at
Figure 15 various location, external switching platforms
An example shows routing alternatives in a W- are shown reachable via the fibre network. SENS solution including use of laser and radio in combination. Figure 25 a, b, c.
Shows how power reduction due to increased
Figure 16 routing alternatives could save frequency
Shows an example of a general structure of spectrum, shows how shorter hops could be one type of station with combinations of used for various routings with increased switching functions including the possible use transfer capacity between station on a given of external switches/routers and possible traffic spectrum further that shorter hops typically led between geographically scattered W-SENS to more variation in elevations which can be networks via other networks. utilised.
Figure 17 a, b. Figure 26
Show examples of general possible structures Show examples of W-SENS systems of stations based on one or more switching implemented based on connectionless functions. switching and/or ATM switching and how these principally can be integrated at various point
Figure 18 via wireless ports.
Show examples of mixture of stations type are operating in a same network. Figure 27 a, b, c, d.
Show examples of various antenna systems
Figure 19 a, b. covering each a region, serving one or more
Show examples of possible time segmentation wireless ports each and/or one or more sub- prepared for carrier and/or sub-carrier, in order wireless ports each. to be able to adopt to various functions which It is also generally shown how switching and/or needs accurate and co-ordinated timing, like power distribution on intermediate and/or radio frequency of one wireless port or sub-wireless port is applicable for FDMA respective TDMA inclusive SDMA between wireless ports.
Figure 28
Shows an example of a network management application program (connectable via a PC or similar at any station etc.) visualising a network topology, such vision and others of the network is supposed to make it possible to set-up, define, re-design communication.
Figure 29 a, b, c, d, e.
Show various examples of switching and/or power distributing on intermediate and/or radio frequency, i.e. in order to achieve P-MP communication between wireless ports. It also shows an example of combination use of wireless ports for point - point communication is applicable with one or more point - multipoint applications.
Figure 30
Shows a general structure of a possible wireless port implementation.
Figure 31 a, b, c.
Shows one example of a modular station structure where expansion of station capability in switch capacity and/or multiple wireless ports is achievable.
Further are examples shown of stations using power distribution and/or switching on intermediate frequency or radio frequency level for a point - multipoint applications.
Figure 32 a, b, c, d.
Shows an example of one reason to be able to split the protocol on a carrier or sub-carrier in a data and/or a relatively small signalling time portion. At visualised time increments there would be a possibility to change transfer capacity, change frequency, re-direct antenna apply synchronisation etc. Further are visualised how selected carriers could use the full capacity of a continuous data flow on a carrier regardless this portions is applied or not, as it in such case is a lower level protocol and data could be applied.
Figure 33
Shows one example of means of a wireless port, which contains some switching functionality.
Figure 34
Shows one additional example of a wireless port structure. Figure 1a regional areas A view of a possible
The general idea with this figure is to show an implementation of the method into a system is example of an implementation of the method in generally shown The stations are viewed from a system where communication between above The stations are normally fixed located stations are passed via ports either physical placed on earth in a mast, on a house, on a local ports connected to wires/fibre or though wall, indoor and/or outdoor, it could in some ports specifically designed to carry information applications be considered placed in a between station through the air At each station balloon, aircraft, satellite, terrestrial movable is at least one switching function taking care of units, lap - top communication etc As various the selection of switching and/or routing WPs could be considered allowing potentially a information between ports mixture It further illustrates a wireless communication network consisting of two or more stations Systems implemented based on the method based on the method The idea with the have means for control and/or supervision drawing is to generally vision that any station This is applicable at any station generally can communicate or distribute or receive visualised on stations as 200 as exemplified at information between each other through the station 11 and 13 Means for organising routing air, example 300-304 They need to be between stations is applicable and possible to equipped with appropriate transceiver means visualise set up, re-route etc via a PC or a any (transmitter and receiver) for it this This type of network terminal etc It could be solution results in an in a non-hierarchical physically located or distantly located from the arrangements of stations which can freely station or stations it concerns communicate Communication between station is taking care of by the as multiple pair of Further meaning with the illustration is to show Wireless Ports (WPs) as schematically shown the non-hierarchical structure applicable It by 550 at each station Thus, no station is allows that principally any stations port can be central or no station is terminal as in wireless terminating to another network to extent access solutions Stations (10, 11 etc ) are another network and/or it could be used to equipped with electromagnetic transceivers at connect user to applications and/or support the WPs (as an example 550/568) These pair user to user communication Stations switching of WPs are designed with electromagnetic functions capability means that it include a transmitters and receivers which are the tools possible work as a switching platform between to establish communicate between stations its own ports (UP.TP, WP) for local and/or through the air, 550 Each pair of WPs are distant traffic and/or including other adjusted to its specific quality requirements applications, like operating as a backbone based on available frequency band, switch potentially at each station and location modulation method, transmission power, error for any external use Methods are included to detection, error correction, directed radio use the expansion of stations to increase antenna means (when radio band is used), etc switching capabilities trough the air or Thus, multiple frequency bands and standards elsewhere in that area for the network it self are applicable (various routings etc ) and for external
It is further schematically shown that user applications as well Thus, large number of traffic to/from any user application at stations connection points (users) would potentially (1010), is communicating via Users Ports, UP result in a giant switching capability in such (100, 101 ) Termination Ports, TP, to other area Means to utilise such added capacity is networks can be applied at selected stations applicable by re-design or routing, increase and ports transfer speeds, etc allowing higher transfers
User information is generally visualised through the air The method and the inserted or dropped via UPs or at TPs (1000) implementation include means to offer and combinations of UP, TP 1020 Stations are switched services for connected users locally equipped with switching function that include at each station, between different station means for local switching between ports at and/or between users and external networks stations (100, 101 ) and means for switching This directly from the wireless network solution data between any of the ports UP, TP, WP at and in addition similar switching services any station Thus insert and drop of digital offered by other switching devises is applicable information and/or repeat and/or termination of i e switching function includes means of information are applicable at any station serving external wireless network, wired The idea with the example in the figure is to connections etc define the method applicable specifically ideal for wireless terrestrial networks in local and or Figure 1 b The vision with this figure is to show an hop lengths are generally shorted (less example of where stations in figure 1 a) transmitted power required at maintained differently located in latitude and longitude also capacity and quality) and more alternative may be different located in high's above elevations are obtained Further, it visualises ground The relative high difference is how elevations could become increasingly specifically occurring if stations are located in a more different the denser the network are hilly landscape and/or in separated by getting used by the network to optimise it In relatively short distances In a city networks summary means to control alternative routing, may stations (or WPs) be located at different reduction power and also transmission power highs of a building, etc The meaning is also to control leads to a possible improved use of illustrate how the spectrum space and the total amount of information transferred in a frequency reuse would be possible to utilise given frequency spectrum in a specific space better and better in a gradually denser surrounded the stations In addition the network By using narrow beam antennas security is improved, as means for selecting between pair of WPs in communication (in the various routing alternatives is applicable to care of using radio), power regulation, reselect routing etc and additional optional means as Thus means for controlling and optimising described in this document is the increased radio power, modulation level, routing via WP variation of elevations occurring possible to switching, re-routing, antenna directions etc utilise to use spectrum efficiently Transmission thus frequency spectrum are here shown to be power control is here envisioned to prevent increasingly possible to utilise more and more unnecessary pollution of the spectrum of effectively in a given area and a given emitted electromagnetic power Such power frequency band control is basically estimated to be adjusted to Using various adoption techniques i e adjust achieve the needed transmission quality for the actual transfer capacity (bandwidth between each pair of WPs Factors possible to requirement) between each pair of ports the include in calculation is generally based on use of spectrum is being possible to use even radio hop distance, frequency, modulation more effectively, supporting even more users level, forward error correction, antenna etc performance etc In addition measure of the actual performance and adjustments thereafter Figure 2 is applicable The meaning further with the The general idea with this figure is to further illustration is to confirm that the wireless explain some possible means of implementing communication between stations through WPs the method and additionally sub-methods The is organised typically via narrow beam figure is basically showing traffic flows between antennas (example 320) at each side stations are arranged via pair of WPs The Antennas from 10 GHz and above in the radio figure is just exemplifying is as one of many bands could results in small narrow beam possible configurations of a system antennas which are getting smaller the higher implementation the band In the 20-40 GHz bands could as an The stations 10 and 11 are equipped with a example antennas 10 - 20 cm be used, thus switching function here represented by 2 The applicable to use in any environment general ports to carry traffic and/or other Alternatively are narrower beams obtainable networks or extensions to other networks are above radio frequencies (>300 GHz) Means named 100, 101 , 102 etc The port related to for establishing light wave (fig 23, 560) the switching function and the WP is here communication between ports is applicable named 600 Individual types of ports like various speeds and/or standards is named
The meaning with the figure 1 b) (and 1 a) is 110, 111 etc The interface 110/600 shown also to illustrate that the increase of number of at station 10 may be a standard user port or stations in a limited results in increased routing close to similarities in order to make it possible possibilities as all stations principally can be to remotely locate 500 and or 550 via a designed to communicate with each other, standard cabling If the switching functions 2 provided line of site occur etc It also shows contain an IP switch and/or including routing that if station 10 and 13 which could be capabilities for standards ports of today like considered to be established first A new 10, 100 and/or 1000 Mbit s and/or other station 11 could be reached either via 11 or 13 standards and/or other future Ethernet If another station 14 is installed there will be standards Cabling could be used to connect various routing possibilities to/from 14 via 10, one or more WPs at each station distant from 11 , 13 or combinations of them This shows 2, 10 that the routing alternatives are increasing, the In the case of using radio frequency bands are mode seen from station 10 Other types of the WP at respective side containing means for WPs in combination of WP pairs for P-P transmitting and receiving digital information at modes would be applicable in a system each port as schematically indicated in this implementation Thus the P-MP mode figure by 500 I e 500 suppose to contain resembles of the resource sharing of a central signal processing, modulator, demodulator, station in a typical wireless access system transmitter, receiver, radio filter and being between stations, however in this case it could connected to an antenna system, 582 when be limited to transfer between switches only It radio frequencies are used The unit 501 at includes also means to be used for emulation station 10 is illustrating another type of WP of virtual access systems (fig 20) In fact the Means for arranging communication at each various resource-sharing scheme applied like pair or port may be different depending on FDMA and/or TDMA and/or CDMA or frequency band used, radio or laser etc combinations with or without spatial arrangements, SDMA Included are variation of
Individual pairs of WPs include communication an FDMA approaches including means for means including frequency select, modulation, control of selectable number of sub-carriers level, error correction level etc that is per remote WP for multiple transparent selectable specifically for each pair of ports connections between station similar to as if Multiple WPs at each station can of course be point - point mode operation were used, but identically designed as well or mixture of typically for less capacity various types and standards Means to apply TDMA scheme on carriers is Functions include traffic drop and/or repeating applicable TDMA would have the at any station An example in the figure show disadvantage of a frame structure coursing information that is coming in via the air at additional delays per hop In addition station 11 from station 10 being switched to synchronisation and timing would be needed port 112/600 via 1 1/2 for traffic that shall be between effected WPs Means to combine repeated to another station or to port 101 for TDMA as a combination to FDMA is applicable traffic that shall be dropped by the possibility to time frame per carrier Thus, a finer capacity selection would be
If the switch 2 in the example is a applicable than FDMA only which could be connectionless switching routing function it is typical applicable in optional virtually access considered to include means for fast switching solution Both FDMA, CDMA could course performance If the time delay to pass through fewer problems with delay and synchronisation each stations switching function from port 110 than TDMA to 112 (and vice versa) is done at a neglected In the case of P-MP mode the available time delay (from the users application capacity of a WP would be shared and hence perspective) seamless flows could be arranged reduced in comparison for stations connected via multiple repeating steps This leads to a via p-p mode However it would make it relative free selection of routes (i e many applicable to use for access and for directions at each station and no hierarchical interconnections between stations with low structure as for radio access solutions) bandwidth requirements This is an illustration Means to select multiple routs are applicable to of differences between W-SENS structure and set-up in practice an all to all station its many advantages in comparison to communication arrangements which is to be traditional wireless access In fact W-SENS used in various ways like alternate routing to could include virtually multiple wireless access increase spectrum efficiency and/or increase functions as illustrated but also the possibility security and/or increase transfer capacity, of serving with backbone switching capability redundancy at each station In fact when multiple WPs are added at each station the possible area
Figure 3 transfer and internal switching volume is
The figure is suppose to generally show the expanded Every new station in an area have a means to use alternative WPs indicated by capability to connect more station and each 551 This particular WPs transmission means station can be expanded with a number of 551 is arranged in such a way that multiple WPs Each pair of WP having a certain transfer WPs at other stations 11 , 12, etc can capacity which could correspond to TP/UP communicate through it I e means not only for ports used or be less which could be typical for single pair of configurations as illustrated by radio, 550 In this case it is illustrated how a WP, The number of ports and the capacity of each 551 , at station 10, is arranged to exchange of these ports may be based on standard rates information between multiple WPs in a P-MP used for connectionless switching as an example 100 Mbit/s duplex or semi-duplex WPs at other stations, means are also included ports, semi-duplex 10 Mbit/s ports or duplex to allow external wireless access systems 1000 Mbit/s ports working as illustrated in figure 3 Principally
In a case shown for demonstration only is a any external wireless access system based on switching function having a capacity of any standard or evolving standard (like 802 11 , assigning up to around 30 ports for 100 Mbit/s 802 16 or Hiperaccess, or Hiperlan or ETSI (Fast Ethernet duplex) and 2-8 for 1000 Mbit/s TM4 co-existence standards, TSR 34 etc ) is at each station It would in this case result in a applicable to being connected via appropriate station with a total switching capacity function user ports (100, 101 , 120 etc ) The interface of around 8-16 Gbit/s Multiplied at many towards W-SENS is in such case applicable on locations this would represent an enormous appropriate interfaces physical and/or logical total switching capacity in the specific area In standard Means to include use of internal a situation visualised above extreme air switching function (2) and/or external switching transfer capacities would be possible to (2') functions at any location is applicable for handle I e means to handle large volumes of connected external wireless access systems switched or routed data inside a W-SENS solution is applicable Further is an increased Means to arrange transparent communication use of stations including possibilities to connecting such external system(s) at any connect stations at more terminating points station via a network based on the method and increasing the capability even more I e to or relevant sub-methods (W-SENS) and connect stations to other networks, like fibre connect such access system to any other backbone and other switching platform's other switching unit outside of a W-SENS network high-speed switching/routing networks, with a (figure 4 1001 ) in included possible offload of traffic from the air Emulation of access solutions is further shown Included are means to arrange antenna in figure 20 system, which could be used in spatial mode of operation, as visualised in 581 This is In this figure 3 and in other figures in this visualised as an SDMA arrangement where document are antenna beams shown to be pointing beam are arranged from WP 551 to pointing in one flow direction only The reason the other WPs it communicates with Using is just to simplify the visualised transfer in one TDMA include means to arrange for possible direction in the examples given Means for alternative direction in selected time slots for arranging antennas and antenna lobes in the selected carrier and/or sub-carriers Using in the opposite direction is normally occurring FDMA includes means for transmit and/or as an understatement as duplex receive in multiple directions with other WPs communication is performed in most cases simultaneously One beam is directed to each corresponding station Using FDMA and/or Figure 4 CDMA includes simultaneously operation of The figure shows examples of applications in multiple beams as long as communication is schematic network structure Means are performed Means to use various types of included for Network management functions antenna systems is included These may be like set-up, supervision and control functions at various types like phased arrays, selection of stations Means are included to allow remote multiple horns, selection of multiple horns network management operation, i e any towards a common reflector and/or other station, any WP etc is addressable and arrangements for laser, light wave beam reachable via communication protocols switching devices and/or beam spread virtually from any anywhere in the network techniques multiple arrays A spatial antenna and/or outside This includes means for IP arrangement is visualised by 581 addressing and/or similar communications Included is possible use of sector coverage protocols It is shown applied via station 10 but and/or omni-directed coverage antennas in fact means including connection virtually at visualised by figure 5 583 Even if this could any station Further station 10 is shown to be reduce the spectrum efficiency it simplifies the equipped with a switch and/or router function arrangement and reduces the cost in type 2 or 3, process control function, 9, one or comparison to spatial antennas and includes a a number of UPs, 100, 101 , a TP 105 and a way to simplify distribution simultaneously to number of WPs The process control function many stations includes processor and applied software functions, which includes handling real time
Besides means to arrange internal P-MP transfer, through station, network management transmission capability between switches by etc This control supervision function is using resource sharing of one WP with other schematically shown connectable for stations, 200, for direct connection to processing possibilities to transfer signal information to the function, 210 these are via a terminal function, corresponding end (ends) to define any and/or a PC etc included with appropriate selected synchronous form of the synchronous application programs for the set-up and/or signal that is taken or (derived) at the ends control and/or supervision Means for control This includes possible reshape of both data and supervision of any WP is applicable at any and signalling information should it be needed WP Means to physically reach any WP is I e as one example only, an applied ITU-T included as indicated by 210 shown signal E3 at one end is spiced in a number of schematically at station 12 I e functions ITU-T E1 signals including appropriate including means for set up the wireless signalling at a corresponding end network ports to appropriate speed, power Further included are conversions of signals level, bandwidth, antenna direction etc based between synchronous ITU-T signals based on on required transmission quality including G 703 etc convertible to ATM and/or SDH or control and supervision of performance vice versa Means are additionally included to Possible direct connection supporting roof top allow synchronous data that is transferred installation and maintenance is potentially being converted to asynchronous signal at the applicable etc other end including applied with appropriate IP protocols
In the case of using connectionless switching function, visualised by 2, are means for Means to convert data that have been conversion between Ethernet type of transferred over W-SENS dropped, here synchronous types of ports typically used in visualised schematically at station 11 , 102 I e the telecommunication area (E1/T1 , E2/T2, the functional unit 120 include conversion of a E3./T3, SDM-1 , SDH, SONET, ATM, etc ) serial asynchronous stream 102 to a applicable Means indicated as generally synchronous stream (or multiple synchronous visualised at station 11 include conversion streams if splicing is required) in shown including at least rates of those between at functional unit 120 least Fast Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet ports Typical synchronous traffic flows used in the Means are included to achieve a synchronous telecommunications area which are supposed drop of data 121 irrespective of the to be transmitted and/or dropped over W- asynchronous transfer inclusive the possibility SENS stations are schematically visualised of various routing alternatives through the entering at 121 at the functional unit 120 and network has been used or not and/or continous being connected to W-SENS a station at 102 parallel routs for the same signal have been for further transfer applied Means are included for extracting of I e means are included to convert clock of applied synchronous stream to synchronous flow that shall be transmitted over functional unit 120 Means are included to use W-SENS to an appropriate asynchronous form such clock by the functional unit 120 to clock and applied with appropriate signalling protocol out data synchronously in the reverse including addresses for such transfer over W- direction I e including the capability for each SENS I e this include means to apply IP application to control the clock stability from signalling protocols based on IPv4 and/or IPv6 each application if required by clocking out the Means to achieve transparent transfer of asynchronous received data from station synchronous data over stations based on towards the application by the functional unit connectionless switching is applied Means to 120 apply appropriate signalling for the transfer Means to use another clock from another including transfer of appropriate signalling applied application and or another clock for information of the synchronous signal at clocking out data synchronously from 120 is corresponding port end and/or ends if also applicable broadcast of applied signal is required I e including means to set appropriate protocol to Means including conversion between different such information that is to be transferred as it protocols and switching and transmission being able to indicate reserve of enough methods typically used for ATM, SDH, DTM, or transfer capacity including setting priority for any circuit switching flow and connectionless such transfer through the stations Information data flows and switching is applicable I e about synchronous signal it self is transferred synchronous data streams transferred over to the end and/or ends executed in functional stations includes reinsertion of synchronous unit 120 in order to allow re-structure the signals in original (or required form) as it was transferred signal at an original shape at the entered at the other end regardless if the other station end (or ends) Including whole bandwidth of a synchronous signal was means are included to allow multiple transferred or not connected users via central station b and/or
I e means to detect bandwidth requirement on similar stations as b to be virtually connected applied signals is applied and means to assign under one or more external switches/routers appropriate transfer capacity though W-SENS 1001 , as generally visualised via a connection stations is applied Means to manually (via shown as a dotted line between b and 1001 network management system etc ) and/or This dotted line represents virtually a automatically assign appropriate transfer synchronous including ATM based and/or an capacity for selective signal to be transferred asynchronous depending of the type of based on changes detected in the assigned external switch etc and application In the protocols of applied signals including detection example for a wireless access solution and of over flow in buffer memories if transfer connectιon(s) to its switch function (which was capacity is not enough external the W-SENS in this example), but it
Method functions and means are included as a could be for any application As an example consequence of what is said for transferring station b includes application of a mobile base originally synchronous data (121 ) station I e applications of connection between asynchronously by reserve capacity through a number GPRS and/or W-CDMA etc base the various pair of WPs to at least correspond stations requiring to be connected a one or to such and the required signalling The more external switch and or router functions method includes similar function for related to the service the mobile network offer applications based on LAN, Fast Ethernet, Means to apply other wireless access networks Gigabit Ethernet etc I e asynchronous data at selected stations in W-SENS structures ports, which is directly applied to a station, as based on evolving ETSI BRAN standards like exemplified at station 11 , 101 The required the various Hiperaccess, Hiperlan standards transfer of data that is exemplified by voice IP, and corresponding US and Japanese video IP, video conferencing etc By detecting standards are included Other standards like the sum of such transfers a required transfer bluetooth included etc This includes possible means to assign transfer capacity per pair of switching and/or routing of user traffic and/or WPs is applicable signalling between various external access base stations (similar) through stations in the
Means are included to assign external wireless W-SENS structure should such application be systems in order to extend W-SENS In the required This include transactions of data for figure is two types visualised functions like hand-over, roaming etc In one case is an external a central station, a shown applied to station 12 via port 105 which Figure 5 traffic flow is controlled by the switching One example of many possible physical function 3/2 of station 12 The dotted parallel implementation structures of a station, which is lice between switch functions 3/2 symbolise based on the method, is shown in the figure signalling protocols Thus the W-SENS system The basic idea is to show some various is in this case offering a backbone switching functions and means to realise WPs It is only facility (2/3) and the external access system the intention to generally indicate possible offer extensions "as transparent as possible" to ways of implementing few variable types of connected users under the switching function WPs, some splicing options of modem 2/3 of 12 Means are included to use multiples capacity, various antenna arrangements etc of similar access systems at selected stations applicable in systems based on the methods in W-SENS Means are included to allow functions and means described in the connection between users connected under a document wireless access system (a) via 3/2 It include users connected under another similar external A further idea with the figure is to show that access system at the same station and/or any WP (550) has to be equipped with means other W-SENS stations and/or other external for transmit and/or receive functions in radio switches and/or routers (like 10', 10" etc in bands (568) or higher frequencies (laser etc ) figure 18) In the figure is a frequency duplex arrangement exemplified Means to selectively
Another case shown by b is another wireless arrange various bandwidth and/or transfer access system connected to port 101 at station capacities for the transmit transaction direction 12 The port 101 at 12 and port 105 at station is included I e including balanced and/or 10 is virtually offering a transparent connection unbalanced communication between any WPs between the external backbone switch 1001 The actual design of each WP is possible to be and the wireless access system b Thus, differently arranged between those applied on a same station Except the electromagnetic ■ measured the load on memory to get an carriers are at least the following means opinion of to low or to high transfer rate is schematically included applied between WPs
■ one receiver (558) ■ vary transfer capacity between WPs in
■ one transmitter (a radio head) correlation to quality requirement
■ one demodulator (556)
■ one modulator (552) The processing function unit visualised by 566/1 may be located elsewhere or taken care
Additionally are at least included of by processing unit or units for the switching
■ means for converting data on port 110 functιon(s) indicated by 9 before it is transmitted over the air The processing functions unιt(s) is considered
■ means to convert data received from air to containing control programs for setting up and port 100 controlling and/or supervision of transmission between WPs
Further means are at least included Means for applying external communication
■ to apply and arrange communication devices for the set-up, configuration, control protocol i e the specific air interface etc and/or supervision is applicable by assigning for each WP which shall communicate with network management function terminal via an at least one other WP via the air selectable WPs and/or on stations which is
■ for application of error detection and/or generally visualised by 210 for WP or an error correction codes to data which is optional similar port 200 for a station going to be transmitted over the air
■ for detection of bit error performance Separation in sub-WPs of one WP is applied and/or including correction of data allowing a basic WP modem capacity, based received from a corresponding WP on more tan one sub-carrier, to be spliced transferred over air via WPs including the possible use in different
■ for controlling the processes on one or directions creating virtually more than one WP more WP at the same station and/or I e if a modem were focused on only one WP corresponding WPs at other statιon(s) is all capacity could be applied with higher visualised as a processing function 566/1 transfer capacity WP in one direction and with where process control mechanisms for the one other WP communication between ports, switch function, handling of respective WP It is further generally visualised, as an example transfer internal in the station and only, of method and means how WPs is split corresponding WPs at other stations is up 570 into sub-WPs The method is also performed via software applicable for a WP, which is not separated in sub-WPs
When radio frequency operation is applied at This includes means for separation of WPs least an antenna system is included (some from radio/antenna parts on one hand and possible exemplified by 582, 583 and 581) and modem, logic's etc and/or switching and UPs at least a duplex filter arrangement 569 when some distance away via low loss, low cost frequency duplex is applied cabling One such possible physical realisation is to use an intermediate frequency separation
Arrangements are made to handle effectively between radio heads (laser if applied) and various traffic flows which are required to be logics, i e via cabling on a lower frequency transferred via WPs over an available transfer than the bearer frequency rate between WPs which may be less then at certain traffic peaks Means to improve hop-lengths reduce cost and
Means to intermediate store data (visualised size of radio heads is applied by locating these by 551 M and/or 551 MUP) under periods when as near as possible to horn and/or applied the data transfer requirement is higher than the directly to a horn etc allocated transfer rate though to a This method includes the use of antenna corresponding WP (generally exemplified by 581 or 583 or
Means are included to control the average similar) capacity requirement for burst data by Means to allow location of a number of small including control of the load of an intermediate radio transmitter/receivers on an antenna digital memory function system is exemplifies by (581) This antenna Means are included to exemplified shows supports of multiple parallel
■ assign transfer capacity between WPs beam operation (like multiple horn works on a based on allowed delay performance common reflector) I e a radio head per horn is applied which in turn is connected to its and/or if time division between the scattered respective WP and/or sub-WP in order to WPs, TDMA, is applicable select the antenna coverage or direction The In addition frequency-hopping schemes meaning with the various antenna lobe sizes between a number of commonly sub-carriers shown is to indicate inculcation of regulation of different is in addition applicable transmission power depending on hop distance Methods functions and means supporting to corresponding WP continuos streams at selectable transfer rates
Thus, by selecting (routing) traffic to any WP including selection of number of carriers, and/or sub-WP a transmission direction to a selection of modulation level, error recovery corresponding WP at another station is Methods functions and means for point - applied Including in fact switching/routing multipoint (P-MP) communication between between WPs, sub-WPs on the same station WPs (sub-WPs), including functionality's for
■ FDMA/FDMA, i e individual selection of
Means to allocate any radio head to an number channels, sub-carriers in each direction of directions is included in order to make it (down and/or uplink) possible to select direction per WP, sub-WP ■ FDM/FDMA, i e common share of etc for continuos streams in point to point bandwidth sub-carriers etc by a group of mode of operations between WPs and/or sbb- WPs in down link direction (to multiple WPs WPs) and selective use of separate
Transfer of data via the air between multiple frequencies on reverse up- nk direction WPs is applicable This includes « FDM/TDMA, i e as above in down-link communication between one WP (sub-WP) direction and TDMA on common frequency and a number of other WPs (sub-WPs) in a band in the up-hnk direction, see below point - multipoint mode, P-MP This include ■ TDMA TDMA, i e share of a bandwidth means of selecting a number of sub-carriers and using time frame structure including and/or sub-channels (see generally figure 8 a) means to allocate time slots within frames between respective pair of WPs for their to select individual transfer capacity respective transfer between each other between WPs (sub-WPs) either in down and/or up-hnk direction
Multiple carriers are also applicable to be ■ TDM/TDMA, i e time division separation possible to be used in common by multiple done logically on information transferred scattered WPs (sub-WPs) form a WP to multiple WPs and TDMA in Means to use the same and/or overlapping the up- nk direction frequency bandwidth of one WP (sub-WP) communications resources at a station to be Means are included to utilise spread spectrum used by multiple other WPs (sub-WPs) at other transmission utilising coding and/or frequency stations (at least in the direction toward the hopping for WPs arranged for point - point scattered WPs) is applied mode and or WPs arranged for P-MP mode Multiple users, which transfer data between WPs (sub-WPs) on overlapping frequency Means to apply spatial division for the WPs bands (carrier, sub-carriers), include means to arranged in P-MP mode of operation i e logically separate such traffic between the SDMA (spatial) are included (as visualise by various users 581 , figure 3)
Means to separate multiple users traffic via WPs operating on overlapping frequencies is Method in W-SENS approaches include to separate users in segment on carriers, sub- effective adoption to station topology changes carriers Example of one of many possible allowing new routing possibilities when new segmentation structures per carrier is shown in stations occurs in a network Means for figure 19 Means to signal between WPs who structuring and/or restructuring of networks are and when which segment whom uses for the included Means to allow the possibility to vary transfer of data between WPs transfer and/or add transfer directions in unpredictable directions are included for point-
Sharing of communication resources between point mode of operations as well as point- users in the opposite direction from multiple multipoint mode of operations between WPs WPs to one WP is not applicable on overlapping frequency due to interference This includes means to either manually redirect Means to utilise powerful coding as used as in and/or electronically redirect antennas in new spread spectrum technologies like CDMA, W- and or alternative directions The functionality CDMA, etc and/or frequency division is to prevent the need to (always) install separation of sub-carriers are applied FDMA physically new antennas (like 582, for every new added direction. I.e. by the time of ■ selective transfer speed selection versus installation of a new station an antenna which hop length have a capability to add new main lobes into ■ corresponding error correction adjustment another added directions (including etc. to meet quality performance which as overlapping directions) could be applied. This if well may be required to set individually per it would it economically considered applicable hop. initially when there might be no knowledge of ■ sharing of equipments of a central WP by where the new WP and/or station will be. multiple WPs reduces cost
The illustrated antenna 581 shows one such Common use of equipment are arranged at antenna with a capability to arrange WP and/or station to reduce cost and improve a flexible sub-WPs in multiple antenna lobe directions. and modular variation and expanding of It also visualises a possible spatial separation transfer capacity communication in multiple between communication of pairs of WPs in directions etc. point-point mode and/or point - multipoint Means of sharing equipment include: modes. ■ sharing of station facilities by allowing the
Arranging WP in pairs of Point-Point (P-P), applying of a number of WPs working in communication means that a radio head multiple point - point mode with other (transmitter/receiver and filter, 568, 569) is scattered station used per lobe. ■ sharing of stations and at least one WP
Arranging WPs in a Point - Multipoint (P-MP) including the use common use of spliced mode of operation according to FDMA, into sub-WPs by more than one station, FDM/FDMA, FDM TDMA, TDMA TDMA etc. WP and/or sub-WP Spatial separation i.e. Space Division Multiple « sharing of a station and at least one WP Access (SDMA) is applicable. and/or sub-WP to be shared by more than one WP and/or sub-WP
Various frequency power distribution lobe splitting mechanisms, lobe switching etc. is Efficient use of frequency spectrum and allow further shown in figure 27, where radio heads for high possible transfer rates between WPs are used in appropriate directions (by the and/or sub-WPs in an area to allow the high beams pointing in different directions) etc. bandwidth service to multiple users in an environment are the following means included:
If no spatial separation is required an antenna ■ Switching and/or routing of traffic between solution similar to 583 with continuos coverage stations in selected directions is for is applied i.e. included at least for transmission and/or reception of data from FDMA/FDMA, FDM/FDMA, FDMA/TDMA, user applications (like 1010/1020) and/or TDM/TDMA, TDM/CDMA. including communication with other stations (like 300, 301..) in different
Means to regulate transmitted power is applied direction by digital switched/routing including ability to make changes based on function applied at station various of hop length and / or transmission, ■ Establishment of communication from one fading margin, bit error performance, etc. for station equipped with one WP that allow each specific lobe direction and pair of WPs communication with multiple scattered (sub-WPs) in communication. stations, these station as well equipped at least with one WP where the
The means to arrange for a spliced approach communication from one WP to the other (sub WP) mentioned here is to make it WPs is including transfer via spatial possible to better utilise the total capacity antenna beams according to variable demands. I.e. it also ■ For the shifting between traffic into improve frequency efficiency instead of using different antenna beams by shifting beams the total bandwidth in all multiple directions as at in to corresponding station and WPs at commonly used in standard TDM/TDMA, least for TDMA schemes FDM/FDMA, CDMA and or similar approaches with or without spatial direction control. Example: a group of sub-WPs may commonly share a sub-capacity (and physical bandwidth)
■ Means and advantages with the each sub- of the total potentially available by a central WP approach includes: WP. Each sub-WP includes means to
■ customised physical bandwidth, specifically select its bandwidth i.e. number of
■ channel selection sub-channels and/or sub-carriers. Other sub- WPs may select the use another bandwidth segment or use overlapping frequencies etc switching function unit 2 A station is equipped Thus, means are included to allow with means for controlling the communication
■ respective WP and/or sub-WP (the central to and from a station Such controlling means or the remotes) to tailor for there is visualised by a functioning processing unit, respective transfer requirement and adopt 9 One processing function unit 9 includes to variable bandwidth requirements to means for virtually emulate the processing reduce cost, functions of a WP or more (generally visualised
■ use spectrum efficient, by 9/1)
■ control variation of hop-lengths
Figure 6
The idea with this figure is to generally
I e reduce cost and bandwidth consumption describe methods functions and possible than if all of the possible bandwidth options means to realise WPs where available everywhere
Control function, modems, separation of sub-
To optimise quality of transfer of carriers into sub-WPs etc is shown in some connectionless packet data is means for general examples of systems implementation storing intermediate peak burst of interactive possibilities of a type of WP data (as an example by the use of TCP/IP) Means included for communication is applicable ■ selection of sub-carriers to radio heads
When the peaks of data between WPs is ■ rate on sub-carriers, higher less than the transfer capacity available ■ selection of error control and error between WPs is an intermediate storing of correction on sub-carriers digital data applied, exemplified schematically ■ selection of number of sub-carriers, by 551 M, 55MUP See also figure 12 and 14 ■ of power level of sub-carriers where this is explained further Such memory ■ of intermediate frequency directions function includes ability to be arranged as an switching (ISW, fig 31 b) external memory 551 M, which is including possibility to tailor in memory size, is This includes possibility to separate any WP to schematically indicated work into more than one direction etc as The methods functions and means included at described above for separate bandwidth (no of functional processing unit 566/1 are sub-channels speeds etc ) of respective radio
■ Process of analyse received data quality heads, 568, and for a kind of FDMA
■ Process of the analysed data, eventual arrangement, etc overload etc of 551 M 551 MUP etc
■ Prepare report (NMS) and/or execute An exemplification is made where 4 subcorrections transfer rate adjustments, i e channels, sub-carriers (in the modulator and number of carriers, modulation, power demodulator, 551/567,) are working on one level, single or dual polarisation operation radio head and where 8 sub-channels are etc connected to another radio head, etc FB4 is
■ Control apply of appropriate transfer rate generally indicating functional means for per carrier combining 4 sub-channels on an intermediate
■ Control of apply of appropriate error frequency level and connect these channels to correction per carrier radio head 568 via an intermediate signal
■ Control of analyse of applied received 565/1 For the sake of simplicity in the signalling information on UPs/TPs to and explanation are the number of sub-channels WPs including those between WPs etc for transmit and receive are equal I e means are included to select a required number of
The dotted square of 566/1/1 means to channels grouped and the capacity in transmit represents the actual processes controlled for respective receive direction a number of WPs
Similar functionality's as described for 551 M is Further means to control the capacity including considered for digital ports 100, 110 etc physical bandwidth per sub-channel is applied visualised by 551 MUP In addition these may The selection of different modulation levels as well work in co-ordination with each other if applicable including QPSK, 16QAM, 32 QAM, both are implemented 64 QAM, 128, QAM, 256 QAM, 512 QAM, 1024 QAM, 2048 QAM, 4096 QAM
A vision of a possible station platform is represented by 10 A number of WPs, Ups, is shown in the figure to be controlled by a The use of standard radio frequency plans is for controlling intermediate frequencies of included A typical example is a frequency sub-channels cannel plan based on 28 MHz, which may be ■ to switch the intermediate frequency sub- spliced in a number of combined bandwidths, carrier or groups of sub-carriers to more like 1 75, 3 5, 7, 14, 28 MHz Other may be 1 than one radio head including in selectable MHz channels, 5, 10, 20, 40 50, 100 time depending on circumstances like applications, ■ for distributing any sub-channel or groups standards and countries Arrangement of sub- of sub-channels to more than one radio carriers bandwidth and total bandwidth head considered usable varies according to application etc Means are included to make Means for internal control of any WP is the carrier and/or sub-carrier bandwidth available to a degree needed for functions grouping feasible to be organised in a bunch of envisaged This includes signalling visualised effectively grouped sub-carriers I e as for by 2101 for control and supervision of modem, Orthogonal Frequency Division Modulation quality performance supervision, signal ODFM modulation (exemplified by a Hiperlan processing etc 2102 is visualised to include standard) etc control supervision of radio or light wave Additionally are means arranged to include transmission 2103 is visualising include
■ effective filtering of a selected number of control of antenna direction for spatial parallel sub-carriers arrangements Control and supervision signals
■ include selectively possible vary of includes typically interaction between a modulation level processing unit here represented by 566/1 and
■ based on a standard frequency channels the other functional units of a WP, inclusive
■ simplified intermediate filtering design 566 which is visualised as a simple data
■ allow effectively avoidance of adjacent control or flow mechanism and or switching channel interference function (see also fig 33 2*) The processing
■ allow efficient use of the gained improved units of a WP could be seen as a function if it signal/noise performance by using a is remotely processed outside of the specific multiple narrow channels in comparison to WP As in cases of a central processing use one wide function for the switching performance is
■ to combining equally wide sub-channels in including real time communication control of selectable groups of frequency bands one or more WPs
■ to combine unequally wide sub-channels in In figure 5 is a central processing function, 9, selectable groups of frequency bands visualised at station 10
Method functions means include sub-channels In order to slime an simplify the size, share to be possible to control for functions to increase security etc of specific
■ Individual selectable modulation level WPs, the WPs include means to locally and/or
■ Individual selectable forward error remotely control and supervise one or multiple correction WPs
■ Groups of carriers controlled to selectable Control of flows and performance include modulation levels i e control of group by possible transparent use of either sides group (example - a group of OFDM processing units function i e including remote modems each containing a number of sub- overtake of one WP at one sire of another WP carriers over a certain band - one example Including functions for set-up and/or control is a number of OFDM modems similar to and/or supervision function and selected those used by an evolving ETSI Hiperlan remote real time communication controls and standard) supervision mechanisms by a remote WP process function
Control of carriers in frequencies is required to select appropriate radio channel, arrange A result of this is any of two WP in frequency hoping schemes etc In addition are communication could take over control of the it advantageous to allow separation of WPs other to increase security and flexibility at time between radio and antennas, in addition to be of set up etc This includes the ability to control able to switch directions based on intermediate a set up situation logically from any one end as switching, to distribute intermediate an example frequencies to multiple radio heads for TDM Tools are available to support installation, setand or TDM type of applications up, basic configuration, re-arrange Method functions and means are included communication between stations, WPs etc Methods functions and Means are included to with a selected transfer quality balanced on set up communication between any two WPs actual traffic requirement for such transfer are included This means include set up of between any pair of station stations connected required signalling between any two ports to perform communication effectively Generally Point-point mode of operation or FDMA type P- described processing function units 566/1 are MP mode of operation are continuos streams exchanging signalling data between each other of one or more sub-channels or sub-carriers by the use of one or more carrier which applied (TC1 , TC2 RC1 , RC2 etc ) is applicable data demodulated and set to selected digital Means for signalling between any pair of WPs form at the receive end The communication in order to control and set up an appropriate process include bandwidth i e by adjusting modulation level
■ control of transfer requirement versus quality requirements controlled by error
■ set of bandwidth and number of carriers, correction and/or power regulation) applied for
■ control transmitted power if needed, the respective sub-channels or for groups of
■ control received level, sub-channels
■ record transmission quality, Means for combining digital user data and
■ select speed on carriers or sub-carriers, signalling information is applied on the sub¬
■ adjust and optimise antenna direction etc channels One of many possible data and signalling structures are possible
Methods functions and means possible to included for establishing and maintain One example of a structure with reserved time communication between WPs are for user data and signalling type of information
■ initialise and set up communication is generally shown in figure 19 The between WPs by sending out signalling advantages with this protocol shown is that if information to the a corresponding WP continuos streams are used the time
■ received data at the other end containing interruption indicated for signalling is control data for the remote WP is detected applicable for various other possible features and this control data include information It is applied to simplify frequency shift (under speed select, signalling time segment), speed changes,
■ error correction, blocks of equal size of users data used
■ coding, independent of speed, optional use of time
■ select of sub-channel, division (and TDMA) where the signalling time
■ looping of data at the other end would be utilised as guard and contain synchronisation etc
After that a signalling handshake is realised During continuos transfers of any sub-channel between the two ends, it is possible to agree to the extra "signalling time" reserved is usable a communication protocol transfer rate at any for parallel signalling Error detection and time thereafter between the two ends Such correction of consecutive user data blocks If remote set up mechanism also include spare capacity is available even user data possible remote control of alignment between transfer is applicable two antennas manually and/or distantly to adjust lobes towards each other, i e to Methods functions and means included in a properly align antennas to highest received WP to perform required functions are 566, level at both ends and/or reduce transmission which is a function where typically, error ■ serial data of 110 is matched with parallel data, signalling data of information to be
Means for controlling transfer rate settings and transferred analysed, quality optimisation is included it is controllable ■ control of one or more sub-channels via an network management function ■ signalling data with the corresponding WP visualised by 210 for any WP (at least those is mixed in and extracted equipped with a processing unit 566/1) and 200 for any station In the example given is a number of digital Q
Means for remote control supervision of any signals and I sent and/or received between the station and WP from any station is applied by digital functional unit 566 and the modem the functionality of network management functional unit 551/567 functions
Means are included for manual and/or Figure 7a automatically selection of transfer The figure shows example of implementation requirements between pairs of WPs, including of the method functions means in a system or optimisation of a total transfer rate balanced part of a system In this examples are two WPs 550 shown to communicate. Communication is and/or Gigabit Ethernet and/or any future considered in this case to happen radio evolving standard of similar kind etc. optically performed schematised by 302. Transfer of Asynchronous Transfer Mode Connectionless switching function anticipated signals of various rates is further exemplified as indicated by 2 at station 10 and 11. being transferred transparently should this be required.
Figure 7b and c Synchronous telecommunications signals of
The idea with these figures is to visualise a ITU-T standards from at least E1/T1 up to at number of sub-channels which are different for least STM-1 rates 155 Mbit/s, overlayered with the directions and also changes of the number various protocols including telecommunication of sub-carriers happens in time (x, y for transfer SDH, SONET, IP and ATM. transmit and xx.yy for receive) between station 10 to and from 11. Example of methods functions of means
In the example is visualised that a number of included for connectionless packet data sub-channels are used to carry information to transfer: be transferred between pair of WPs. It is ■ Data to be transferred at station 10, 100t, visualised how shifts occur in number of subincludes ability to handle applications channels from time to time (BWTx and BWTy) which uses various IP protocols and BWRxx and BWRyy). (exemplified by at least the following I.e. it is illustrated methods functions means included IPv4, IPv6, rslP, nat, IPsec etc.). included to: ■ Support efficiently and utilise transfer
■ select bandwidth, capacity either for interactive burst
■ transfer rates on sub-channels, communication or data, which required to
■ selectively per channel, be transferred virtually synchronously like
■ in selectable directions. voice IP, video IP etc.
■ Data signal entered, 100t, contains
Means include selection of modulation level, signalling information which allow it to be number of sub-channels (thus transfer rate) switched and/or routed to interface 110t (a inclusive selection of electromagnetic radio typical serial interface), frequency carrier selectively per direction. ■ Data entered (110t) which have to be routed to more than one WP at a station
The figure illustration show generally a for parallel routing etc. is capable of being selectable number of sub-channels are applied spliced it into various routes and/or for the transfer of information between the two distributed in parallel to more than one WP WPs, 550. controlled by the switching function and/or
Figure 7b indicate number of channels its process function 566/1. allocated for transfer from station 10 to 11 and ■ Data content from 110t entered at WP 550 that the number is shifted to be less at a is including ability to analyse the type of certain time. transfer required,
Figure 7c illustrates a few number of station Data to be transferred include ability to are allocated for transfer from station 11 to 10 filtered out at 550, initially and that the number of channels are ■ Data which has to be transferred as increased after time xx. seamless synchronous (and/or synchronous) include analyse in 550 and
Figure 7d the process of securing that enough
The idea here is to generally visualise methods transfer rate is applied between WPs is functions and means by one example of flows included (taking into consideration other of data between stations 11 and 10. user ports requirements). In order to simplify the explanation of this ■ Data which accepts transfer of a certain example are only two stations interconnected (defined) degradation in terms of variable via WPs and Ups. It should be understood that delays is defined and secured in a similar a number of UPs and/or TPs and/or stations way as for synchronous and/or pair of WPs could be involved in ■ Data at least data that accepts variable transactions of data including those between transfer delays include possibility to any functional devices of stations (processor passed via an intermediate buffer memory functions, network management - signalling function 551 M interactive when user traffic etc.). The user connections in the example at peaks are higher than the applied implies services multi service support for users transfer capacity to the other station being connected to a connectionless continuously supports environment like Ethermet, Fast Ethernet « Data status of such intermediate memory typical rates used by standard radio link function is detectable in order to be used approaches, problems of delay spread typical to regulate the transfer rate between the in radio communications, robust corresponding WPs at least for interactive communication, increased hop-lengths data (typical may be example TCP/IP based traffic etc ) The figure generally visualises use of one type
■ Data supposed to transferred to the other of FDM modulation for communication station inclusive signalling between between WPs stations and/or WPs and/or UPs etc is In the example is a certain number of subpacked in a logical format for the channels (TC1 , TC2, TC3, TC,4 up to TCn) transaction in correspondence to a shown allocated for the traffic in on direction communications procedure via the air and another number of sub-channels (RD1 , which may be based on standards and/or RC2 up to RCp) for the communication in proprietary standards the opposite direction
■ Data is transferred to a corresponding WP The visualisation is only meant to (in the example in point-point mode) where schematically show a certain frequency it is repacked at station 11 550 to a spectrum of each sub-channel The actual selected format and transmitted via 100r to frequency bandwidth of each sub-channel is switching function of station 11 where it is here shown to be about equal, however this switched to UP 1010 may differ from application to allocation The use of a same frequency bandwidth apply to
A similar transaction is taking place in the the use of Orthogonal Frequency Division opposite directions Modulation, OFDM, schemes and/or the use of similar band pass filtering of the sub-channels
A similar process is performed for the other and other advantages type of traffic i e ATM and synchronous telecommunication signal transfers Figure 8b In this cases are their signal format converted The figure shows one of many possible to the appropriate asynchronous signal format modulator structures including signalling before it is transmitted over The figure visualises an example of a the system Including repackaging and modulator (MOD) which modulate a number of clocking etc at the receive side as been sub-channels and applying a filter group described principally in other places of this consisting of 8 channels TC1 TC8 to FB8T1 document Another similar group is formed in parallel FB8T2 These are combed in into 16 subchannels to CC16T These are combined in an
Figureδa intermediate frequency 40001 /IF to be
The method functions and means include use connected to a radio head of more than one carrier The following methods functions and means are included FDM, FDMA, TDM and or TDMA and or
■ ability to scale capacity between WPs by combinations including spatial separation are assigning a selectable number of sub- applicable carriers Method functions and means are included to
■ split the transfer in more than one carrier support it are to lower the total data rate transfer per ■ multiple intermediate signals to be channel (to enable simple and low cost distributed in parallel to multiple radios (in implementation of signalling processing), the example 4), see -IDS figure 31
■ use of selectable modulation schemes ■ shift of one intermediate frequency signal from simple modulation into very complex between radio heads (in this example 4) (simplify realisation of highly efficient use See -ISW figure 31 of spectrum by any of the multiple carriers), Such functions are generally visualised by CH1
■ scale frequency bandwidth between WPs SPLIT or SW), at fig 8b and c
■ split a common modem capacity to be spliced and able to be used in multiple Figure 8c directions, The idea with this figure is to show one of many possible examples of means to arrange
Further advantages are that is would virtually a number of sub-channels for one or more makes it possible to create total transfer rates radio heads (or laser heads) in either in/out which would be scaleable to reach beyond direction of a WP and or sub-WPs In the example are a number of possible sub- ■ Station include options to add WPs to WPs envisaged just for demonstration connect to new stations, delete WPs if purpose The following principal functional stations are disconnected, re-configure units are visualised WP for changing topology demands
■ Modulator (MOD) (different transfer capacity, directions etc )
■ Demodulator ■ Station include options to add various
■ Intermediate distributor/Switch CH1 SPLIT number and types of ports or SW Switching functions of stations include
■ Modulated Intermediate carrier, TC 1 TC transferring, splitting of user data into more 4 than one WP and/or sub-WP (route) to
■ Groupings of sub-carriers (CC4, CC8 etc ) support various transfer routes to the same
■ Intermediate cabling, 4002/IF (transmit), destination and/or multiply a similar 3002IF (receive) message to multiple locations
■ Radio heads, filter, sub-WP virtual point - ■ Switching functions include UPs at various point visualised by 582 antenna stations and/or at the same stations to arrangement and/or sub-WP visualised as transfer information via WPs or not a virtual P-MP via 581 antenna ■ Stations are capable of emulating arrangement functions of wireless access solutions
Functional unit CC4 means to show how 4 Any station than can see another one and sub-channels in either in/or direction are used where these stations are equipped with a or usable However, it is exemplified that corresponding WP communication could be variable bandwidth set-up is applicable by performed indicating 4 channels out and at least 1 Synchronous, seamless synchronous flow channel in requirements, asynchronous packets and/or
The whole capacity of a modem may be used cell is transferable virtually transparent for one radio head (laser) or more directions or The abbreviation 13/13713" (as generally other combinations, as this is only a general described in figure 17 b and 18) indicate a visualisation possible use of a mixture of stations topologies which use one and/or multiple switch and/or
Figure 9 router functions
The idea with the figure is to generally vision Methods, functions and means include some of the multiple communications ■ Switching and/or routing between WPs topologies and services that is envisaged by and/or TPs and/or UPs inside stations (10 use of methods functions and means or 13 etc ) includes switching envisaged in this document ■ Switching outside stations by external function devices mentions by (13' in
Multiple ports are applicable to be connected relation to 13), see figure 18 and the at principally any at any station, in the example further description exemplified by 10, 11 , 12, 13, 14, 15 and their ■ Switching of traffic between scattered corresponding possible extensions like 13' stations and/or 13" etc included to be usable to configure for various communications services The general idea is further to show (A) and types of transactions broadcast of user information i e where one source multiple its destinations (media
The system implementation shown is indicating distribution, films etc ), by applying broadcast systems based on connectionless switching protocol on applied data and means to respond functions in the stations Transparent to send such data along appropriate routes for communication is principally applicable, each destination irrespective of the number of stations passed Further (B, D) indicates an establishment of a at least seen from a user perspective number of possible transparent connections between user application for asynchronous or
Methods functions and means are included for synchronous communication, etc between
■ Fast switching and or routing in order to ports I e principally including termination minimise the added switching delay of data relaying and/or insertion of data and establish packets such connections at virtually any station
■ Stations virtually functioning in any station Application included are transparent transmit of topology configuration principal are data between switching systems and/or operations in a non-hierarchical structure mobile base stations, multiple indoor access implied in regard to each other base stations, multiple access solutions which include connections between these base Example in figures (1-9) are WPs shown stations I e included are connections to connected to digital ports 110, 111 etc external fixed wireless access system Various types of implementations is applicable (example fig 4 -b-) connecting scattered data specifically in regard to where switching and/or and/or telecommunications networks etc routing functionality's are located physically and or how differently switches/routers are
The figure meaning to further visualising interrelated, i e placed on roof top, in the internal communications possibilities to support basement, in the localities of user premises access of scattered users which may or may etc not require high performance switching The figure shown an example of a switching capability locally at the termination point function 2 related to a possible number of WPs regardless if this capacity is available or not connected via a port 110 or more ports 111 Thus, a virtual implementation of logical depending of the total flow required at a functions of multiples of wireless accesses functional unit 600 include possibilities to be solutions to be operating at one or more located at a distance from 610 I e 600 may be stations See also further explanation in figure located outdoor and 610 indoor separated by 20 I e some applications are a use of a x-m via a wire or fibre in order to simplify wireless solution to operate a transparent installation extensions of (an interface -via wire or similar) to connect a user or a user group at a remote In this case the functional unit 610 which also switching system I e such switching system shown to contain a switching function 2' that may be based on any switching function (2) in could be a users network switch/router a system implemented based on the method or supporting internal communication of the data an externally located switch network shown by 1010, where 1012 Examples in fig 3 show also some possible represents multiple user connected to a local means to realise a seemingly access solution data network The block 1010 could represent where WPs are organised in P-MP mode of one or more server functions etc operations for virtual creation of multiple point Applicability of transparent synchronous connections, however multiple point-point WP connections is indicated by 101 , 120 it is could as well be included to logically exemplified as a connection to an external functioning as an access In figure 4 is an backbone network, 1000 external access system (a) connected to Thus a mixture of traffic types is indicated and switch (2) in a W-SENS wireless system a comprehensive station structure consisting of a number of distributed switching functions 2
The transaction of data demands the use of (near or in co-operation with one or a few the equipment and or frequency spectrum thus WPs) which interrelates to a common means for effective sharing of both spectrum switching function 2' at 610 and equipment is included The meaning with the shown structure is to Possibilities to switch and/or route data generally visualise one of many possible between Users in a network are applicable distributed switching concept at a station Each which E and a local F generally illustrates it such distributed switch function 2 at 600 could be arranged to handle a number of WPs in
Methods functions and means are included to various directions and it could in fact alone
■ Set-up connections including various include the services required routings
■ Set -up functions for possible charging The connections between the switching (billing) of transferred data in accordance functions and the WPs can be made short and to volume and/or quality and /or bandwidth one rugged version of 600 could be placed and/or priority (network management MIB outdoor near an antenna system and support data base etc ) an number of directions form each such site
■ Set-up and supervise quality on Including means to connections ■ arrange physically close connections between respective WP, radio and
Figure 10 a antenna horns etc
Figure 10 a) is principally visualising one of ■ establish a station (or part of a station 600) many possible physical structures of a station to be built into a multi-lobe antenna and an example of a station connected to an equipped with a number of WPs etc external user network (packet data oriented - i e Ethernet, Fast Ethernet and/or Gigabit An example of a possible implementation is to Ethernet and a synchronous connections etc ) locate 4 x the 600 units (or more) on 4 separate walls of a building etc all these ■ selection of modulation level of sub- connected to 610 located in a building at a carriers (i e which could be from BPSK, terminal room etc i e in order to establish a QPSK 256 QAM 4096 QAM), station node for a very high capacity « verify transmission quality Bit Error Rate arrangement covering various directions performance BER and/or when applicable Principal difference here between earlier delay performance in reference to required description of a typical station could be to quality replace 110 with 100 and 600 with 10 ■ apply error detection and/or error corrections codes
Figure 10 b ■ apply data (q 1 , etc ) on the parallel
This figure is exemplifying a station that have a carriers to minimise delay similar structure to 10 a) however, its ■ conform to required standards for radio terminology corresponds better to previous and frequency spectrum and/or laser spectrum further explanation of distributed switching used per WP if applicable functionality's and also to the possible ■ transfer data cross polarised on radio integration to other switching routing platforms antenna described in fig 16, 17 a, 17 b, 18 etc « transfer data on vertical and/or horizontal polarisation
Figure 11 a and 11 b ■ transfer data based on separation of This figure illustrates some examples of transfer streams in space and time from packing data that was entered into a WP into individual streams transferred through the some various formats to carriers and/or sub- air and/or to multiple real and/or virtual carriers for the transmission over the air WPs, i e including selective coding on the individual multiple bit streams and/or
Application of data (user data signalling etc ) to include creation of a real and/or virtual be transferred over the air has to be realisation of a reflected environment of transferred as efficient as possible Methods the emitted information as it is received by functions and means are included being able the different WPs to adopt to certain wireless standards including those for radio relay, radio links, fixed and/or As mentioned there are several reasons applied mobile wireless access for tele and/or organise transfer in parallel like data and/or internet and/or media ■ influence from eventual delay spread from communication and/or distribution air transmission Besides standards protocol adoptions included ■ selection of limited frequency bandwidth according to requirement of the WP per sub-channel makes it principally communications are proprietary possible to increase the hop length in communications standards on WPs applied comparison relative if the whole bandwidth should be always used (less noise on the
Below is a few examples illustrated how data q channel) 1 , k 1 , which are considered entering from ■ implementation of error detection and error port 110 etc entering 550 being analysed correction or generally signalling spliced and formed for the actual transmission processing of each sub-channel separately over the air It may include adoption error could be more easily integrated per subdetection and/or error correction, it this is not channel transferred data than if one high applied differently in the respective modems speed channel where used
Transmission through the air that include Practical implementations of radio links are as carrying digital modulated information on radio an example typically limited to about 400-600 frequency carriers includes possibilities to use Mbit/s these rates could be superseded by the a number of sub-carriers in parallel order to use of multiple parallel sub-channels enhance communication between WPs implementation In addition realisation of effective utilisation of frequency spectrum highly efficient modulation The OFDM modulation method in a coming method and/or including other means for such Hiperlan short range standard could be realisation like separation of streams in space applicable as well as the modem structures and time shown here for demonstration purpose or other
In order to apply to such parallel streams of modems for multi carriers and/or single carriers communication are means included for as well should it be required on specific WPs ■ selection of number of sub-channels thus also physical bandwidth, Methods means and functions are arranged to transfer data sequentially concerted and Other alternative protocols or complementation transferred secure limited time delay, limited of the procedures or protocols may be applied extra over-heads to achieve an appropriate and 11 c shows a slight variation In this case i security the picking and placing interrupted as a data block is applied and a new packet is applied is
The idea with the figures 11 a and b is to show staring at a specific selectable sub-channel a few examples of many possible to include for channel, in this case shown to be CH1 converting virtually serial digital data packets This is only to visualise that many potential entered and prepared are applied sequentially means of various possible "serial" to parallel Transfer represented by 100/a and 100/b conversion models are optionally available entering at a WP from a switch function (2) Ability to transfer data safely for users by In this example picker and placed byte by byte preparing prevention's for eavesdrops etc is to the parallel channels sequentially (from low applicable to high) until the whole set of information is Methods functions and means are included to applied (q 1 ) "Packet" (q 1 )by "Packet" vary the picking and placing to achieve a (k 1) etc may sequentially be placed as possible coding of the data transfer purposes visualised by 11 b to increase security Thus data bits or bytes of
This data is applied into a suitable format for a serial stream include according to schemes the transmission through the air This is done « pick of data of the data to be transferred by picking byte by byte of the received packed (q-1 , etc ) at selected positions, bit and/or and apply it to channel by channel sequentially bytes accorting to selectable scheme until the whole packet is applied, 1 to q » place data on sub-channels to a selectable Packets that follow (100/b), 1 to k, etc may be scheme, which may differ from sequential allowed to continue direct sequentially on the (as was previously described) next sub-channel, as principally shown in fig 11 b Additional extra control bytes may be Similar are methods functions and means applied for error detection error correction or applied at corresponding ends to decrypt other purposes selective methods if needed for transferred data in accordance to the schemes the specific packets 100/a and 100/b applied which is signalled and agreed between The byte by byte conversion of serial to parallel the respective WPs transfer is repeated normally unless a certain position of segmentation in data and signalling Signalling for pack and/or repack data flow on sub-channels is applied This including including of various options of signalling possible interruption in selected time positions between WP and stations in the stream flown exemplified by P1 if such interruption is applied between WPs is applied to be used for TDMA and/or frequency shift It include signalling for agreed frequency shift and/or modulation level adjustment etc See an (at P1), speed variation assign applications example of a possible data and signalling applicable between the respective WP ends segments on sub-channels, figure 19 S1 SxC1 , S1 SxC1 ) If ATM switches where used and/or ATM cell
Methods functions and mean of transfer of where transmitted towards adopted WPs the through the air include ability to apply to such serial structure of each such cell would lower layer time segmentation protocol or not similarly be applied byte by byte sequentially At position (P1 ) which would be selected to be channel by channel in a similar way as for possible to be repeatable occurring packets of variable lengths In addition ATM independent of modulation level selected (i e cells would be extra protected in its content by at T01 ,T02,T03 etc ), are functions, means error detection and/or in particular protect its included making it applicable to interleave data five byte address code error correction codes transfer on sub-channels included at time (P1) to protect in particular this data with enough for security etc
■ change frequency on carrier, carriers The method of applying extra error protection (including frequency hopping etc), of ATM cells is in addition applied in cases
■ add signalling information where ATM interfaces are connected and
■ change speed supposed to be transferred over a system
■ change coding implemented by connectionless switching
- obtain time frame structure separation in functions I e as converted to asynchronous time etc if time division multiple access Ethernet types of ports (122 fig 7 d) etc when would be applied for the communication connectionless switching functions is applied between stations A low level information protocol structure until it is transferred out from a corresponding described in figure 19, i e information block WP at another station shown in time segments that are called "data" Methods functions and means include fast and include possible structure in such sizes as it at transparent transfer of data at least for data of least could fit into short IP packet of 64 bytes synchronous entering into a WP in order to and/or include an ATM cell of 53 bytes In avoid time delay in the transfer to cases where ATM cells where transferred a corresponding stations switching functions in number of bytes of error correction and error the signalling process and applying procedure detection is possible additionally added to fill to the transmission system by including the "data" block should it be required In fact ■ Sequentially applying coding on data to be this is considered a valuable option to transferred specifically secure as the 5 byte header of an ■ Sequentially applying incoming serial data ATM cell is to poorly protected which could streams to selectively on sub-channels in otherwise course loss and confusing in the parallel (fig 11a) network in making wrong decisions Transfer of ■ Sequentially applying consecutive serial ATM cells or at least its addressing information data streams organised in packet's (IP is applicable to be secured to a level protocols of various kind etc ) and/or cells superseding BER 10-13 should this be (ATM) (fig 11b) needed
Figure 12
Various services and/or various The figure means to visualise variable transfer communications protocols (like ATM) need to flows requirements between various WPs and be safely and to a variable degree their in/or direction transmission Selection of transparently transferred flow capacity and bandwidth adjustment is
Methods functions and means included to applicable at leased for radio transmission improving transmission quality between WPs I e one alternative approach would be to apply by a total available transparency capacity
■ applying extra digital bits of error detection between WPs to correspond directly to the code on data to be transferred (q-1 , etc ) UP/TP capacities Methods functions and
■ utilise applied error detection codes means are included for connectionless applied on Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, Gigabit switching functions applied at stations where Ethernet data packets cells etc ■ the WP would be supporting transparently
■ selectively add error detection's codes on the full capacity of 10, 100, 1000 Mbit/s selected parts of each part of a information through the air constantly applied for traffic as requires more security (like ATM between stations header) ■ WPs supporting full bandwidth assignment
■ applying selectable level of forward error at time periods when data have to be correction coding on data transferred transferred based on modulation method selected ■ WPs are assigned between full bandwidth and/or noticed quality performance at the and/or no connection at all corresponding WP end using variable degree of forward error Considering integration of packet data corrections coding on selected parts of networks and telecommunication types of data data transferred (like header of ATM cells, to be transferred requiring synchronously and/or other services signalling and/or and/or seamless synchronously like IP-Voice, quality improvements required) IP-video real time visions of new on Internet
■ applying forward error codes in etc accordance to quality requirement (which Such arrangements would be far from always could be modulation method, hop lengths efficient as a set up time is needed and/or the or based on actual detected quality etc ) actual bandwidth that is allocated may be far to
■ detecting errors and/or to correct errors much to what is needed and/or it may be after transmission to increase quality uneconomical and/or and result in an inefficient and/or security use of spectrum, etc
Instead of connecting communication between
Not only switching has to be performed fast connectionless switches in a similar way as is between WPs at stations in order to meet cables where used are communication transparency requirement, low delay which between such switches adapted to actual could be reasonable constant but olso in the transfer capacity and type of traffic used in transfer process of data entering into a WP order to achieve as transparent communications as possible in particular when number of wireless connections, as also local radio frequency carriers are used switching at each spot would be possible to The reason for adoptions to radio transmission implement requires effective method functions and means in order to make it possible to share the I e higher the number of scattered stations in frequency spectrum efficient among the an area are the higher the aggregated stations, improve and/or optimise transfer switching capacity occurs automatically in total capacity and/or improve adjustment for in such area This is because the built in variable hop lengths, re-routing etc switching function of any station would be useable too new directions (new WPs etc )
Methods functions and means are included in adding possible transfer capacity at such order to support the communication capacity station and/or quality between UPs, TPs depending on Additionally any new station could potentially traffic transfer requirements by be used to local switching/routing and/or used selection of physical bandwidths per pair of as backbone-switching function for externally WP connected access systems like fixed or mobile controlling of numbers of carriers and rates wireless access setting of modulation level on carriers A non-hierarchical topology structure between WPs, obtainable between stations is obtainable setting of error correction which leads to flexible switching and/or routing setting of transmission power adoptions to and/or termination of traffic In comparison to measure quality performance, BER and/or fixed and/or mobile wireless access network delay solutions, radio links and/or radio links select polarisation arranged in ring topologies and/or any network selection of cross polarised transfer solution based on cables fibres etc known, far controllable via tools supporting more efficient networks is achieved by utilising restructuring of network topology (virtually the air in the way network implementation is irrespective of certain topologies, clocks, shown here Leading to improve services other backbone networks) capabilities and flexibility which is far beyond ■ controllable routing alternatives for ability what have been possible with conventional to increase transfer capacity between network approaches UPs/TPs and/or increase security
Methods functions and means includes
In fact the more stations that are involved the establishing of end (UP) to end (UP) switched more are the switching/routing alternatives and services within a geographical area between again more station users could be added interrelated stations and/or between scattered Considering a geographical area where a W-SENS systems located at various area number of user stations are implemented including ability to interconnect these W-SENS shorter and shorter hop lengths and more areas via other networks variations of elevations of the respective The use of standardised switching platforms electromagnetic beams (radio, laser) would (for 2, 2') connected to other networks make occur Shorter hops are also resulting in less such switching service globally feasible electromagnetic power radiation needed with between even users connected to W-SENS in maintained transmission quality Thus, the wide geographically scattered areas increased effectiveness of the use of frequency resources is gained with an increased density Methods functions and means are included for of stations The higher the density the more the establishment of new stations, re-arrangement density could be etc i e the more stations are of topologies, routes, etc including use of possible to establish As earlier described a flexible re-directable antenna solutions possible self-generating network expansion supporting selection lobes, lobe direction occurs for wireless networks built on the control, radio head (or laser) for connection to method, methods functions principles and corresponding lobe direction and/or lobe means described in this document directions etc The generally name it Wireless-Self Expansion This to allow pre-investment network Network Switching, W-SENS is therefore preparations and/or precautions for future justified for networks built according to the changes, as an example to be made at the method and addition methods etc An time of fist installation, etc I e it may include implementation results in an automatic more advanced antennas system (and more aggregated switching capability/capacity in an WPs and/or sub-WPs than initially required) area, but not only usable for an increased than would be required initially as an example A simple fixed directed antenna at one The figure visualises a view of the stations selected direction could be enough at first from above It is also visualised that hop however if routes are added more sites would lengths between 10 and 13, 13 and 14, 14 and be reachable to improve the network thus pre- 12 is shorter than between 10 and 12 directly investments allows a simplified re-structuring I e traffic would be passing more station but to new routes using much shorter hops The increased
Methods functions and means are included to number of stations would allow in increased remotely via a network management tool number of new stations to be connected as function re-arrange traffic routes and/or add typically line of site between WPs are normally new routes and/or directions at stations envisaged An increased number of stations prepared for such potential changes that are no-hierarchically connectable would further typically be separated in more variable
The principle idea with this figure is to vision elevation of the antenna beams which in differences between of full transparent addition improve the likely interference unlimited connection between typically 100 or probability, hide receivers from each other by 1000 Mbit s ports of switch and/routers This is increased probability of physical obstacles, because the bandwidth limitations often threes, hoses etc needed to apply when radio spectrum is used This enhances the re-use of frequency because of limitation in bandwidth, variable spectrum probability considerably The shorter hop length to cover, cost considerations, the hops the less electromagnetic power adoptions to actual bandwidth requirements required to maintain the same quality, thus less and quality optimisation between each pair of total occupation of frequency band in space, WPs to use spectrum efficient etc see also fig 25 explaining the increased Considering some cases and for the sake of transfer performance further Figure 16, 17, 18 simplification a full and transparent bandwidth explains some variable types of stations allocation may be applied if enough frequency applicable See figure 7 d for further spectrums are available This may be the case explanation in regard to communication for light wave, laser type of communication between stations applied However, in such case may another modulation channel structure be applied with Figure 13 one and/or fewer carrier (in fact similar to fibre The figure illustrates some few examples of transmission) as problems with delay spread flows of user data trough stations, including would be of less significance for short hops separate routing and narrow beams etc A pair of WPs The idea in addition is to generally visualise an connecting stations 10,12, 10,11 ,13,14, etc example where different number of subare schematically indicating this channels /sub-carriers) are arrange for the transfer capacity that is needed for transferring
The variable bandwidth allocation and speed the user information between stations and/or control etc mechanisms is generally shown by WPs applied the interconnections of station 10, 11 and 12 In the application example are shown methods etc The dotted lines between pairs of WPs are functions and means included data to be visualising a maximum total possible differently routed (A-A, C-C, etc ) even if data bandwidth between the respective stations originates and/or terminates at both ends Number 4011 at station 10 represent a inclusive if a common UP TP are used or not maximum possible transmitted rate at a for all traffic specific WP and 3011 represents a maximum receivable received rate (example station 10, The dashed lines a, b and c is here generally 11 ) The corresponding figures for station 11 is representing the routes The bandwidth are 3010 and 4010 The indication 4001 between represented by 10-12, 10-11 and 11-12 which station 10 and 11 and 3001 represents the means to correspond to a number of suballocated actual transfer rate to and from the channels at operating on certain selected respective WPs and 4010 and 3010 represents modulation levels each The meaning with the the transmission direction The stations 13 and different filled rectangles is to show a possible 14 indicated by dotted lines indicate an different modulation levels selected on these example of possible new stations Also note sub-channels the possible new routing between these two stations would be applicable in parallel to Figure 14 improve capacity between station 10 and 12 The figure shows data entered at one station and/or allow redundancy, etc from more than one direction (on separate WPs) is combined in a to another station (applicable to one WP) In addition a number of examples of users
The image generally visualises an example of applications 1010' including telephony how an allocated rates (4002) for transferring applications and or similar applications information (A) through the air from station 11 requiring seamless transparent transfer of data to 10 Further an allocated rate (4005) for and data application etc is shown under a transferring information (B) through the air from stations (14) station 12 to 11 It is also the meaning to generally visualise that the modulation level The block 6000 means to generally symbolise and/or information rates may be different This an external wireless access system applied to is visualised in different structures on the station 10 and/or an internally virtually created information blocks of data transferred wireless access system within W-SENS The 11/100/WP/T1 for station 11-10 Respective wireless access is demonstrating ability to 12/100AΛ/P/T1 for station 12 - 10 These two connect another station 14 via its WP This is flow are combined shown to be transferred into thought at least applicable as it (6000) a WP which applies a capacity for the transfer operates as an internally created virtual access at lesat enough for the summarised data solution (see also figure 20) (A+B) This data including A and B is further Under the external or internal access system is applied on the a carrier and/or sub-carriers, similar types of applications visualised as modulated up-converted to the required under stations 14 i e 1010' including data and electromagnetic high frequency carrier (radio or telephony services or laser) and transferred via the air At the corresponding WP it is down-converted and reshaped into appropriate form at the WP of Thus means for routing the traffic between 10 station 13 where it all or partly may be dropped - 11 could in this example be via station 12 at one or more UP etc and 15 in addition The transfer rate between the WPs for the Such arrangement could encourage the use of station 10 - 13 connection is adjusted to very high rate licence free laser communication conform to at least the sub of the incoming over limited distances as it could be effectively information from station 11 and 12, A+B In this backed with radio transmission solutions case for this flow is station 10 working as a and/or routing alternatives repeater
Methods functions and means includes
Figure 15 arrangement of routing alternatives between
The idea with this figure is to visualise a few of stations for increase of capacity and/or security many possible where multiple stations are by including interconnected in a network including ■ Means to set up selectable routing redundancy routing to increase transfer and/or alternatives manually between stations and improve security The example of network and Ups TPs etc topology routing type of stations, external ■ Means to set up routing alternatives access solutions and/or virtual wireless access automatically (i e including routing and/or number of WPs, UP etc is only given possibilities by IP type of addressing etc ) as one example of possibilities and for between stations Ups/TPs demonstration purposes only « Means for detecting transfer quality of respective route
Complementary arrangements between radio ■ Means to use the sum of the transferred and laser for increased security and/or transfer user information regardless of the variable capacity is visualised between stations 10 and routes taken between UPs TPs applied at 11 The example means to visualise that two or the end of each communication line more WPs (at 10 and 11 ) can be arranged in ■ Means to select any of the use of any parallel, to increase capacity and/or improve routes between Ups/TPs etc based on redundancy between them In the example is quality performance of individual routes high bandwidth laser communication, 315, and ■ Means to set up quality performance typically lower bandwidth microwave required for various types of data communication, 300MW visualised between 10 ■ Means to route different type of data and 11 Both of these WP could of course be including synchronous, seamless either radio or laser of variable capacity synchronous and/or asynchronous A possible additional routing applicability via a selectable routes number of stations 10-12-15-11 is additionally shown As an example user data applied on station 10 fibre and/or copper and/or include wireless at port 100 and at 11 on port 100 could use all (radio and/or laser) or any of the three routes shown Similarly the connections of the respective Real time transfers with higher priorities could WPs to 10/1 , 10/2 etc is applicable to 110, be routed via shorter hops (manually or 111 , 112 etc as earlier described automatically routing) and interactive data transfers could use other routes, including as The functional unit 10' could be said to an example automatic selection of routes with represent a connectionless switch/router of a available capacity for such transfer customer and/or it could be representing a switching/routing combing the traffic in the
Figure 16 various scattered functional units 10/1 , etc at a
The idea with this figure is to visualise a block certain nodal point In addition it include schematic view of one of many possible type of integration of the W-SENS approach with a modular station arrangement In this case is standard switch/routing platform (exemplified switching functions spliced into separate by R10'") which could as an example be a blocks, like 10/1 , 10/2, 10/N and 10' customer platform In addition normal switching and routing The idea behind this is to include traffic to be capability is shown to perform in networks interchangeable with the use of the features in outside of each station but closely associated respective air based and/or wire based Thus with each other Exemplified via logical W-SENS being an integrated part in standard signalling via port 100" between R10'" (an switches/routers (10') network allowing traffic external switch/router function to shown W- to be interchanged via scattered W-SENS SENS applications) and 10' and/or similarly Illustrated by connection of 10' to R10'" and between port 100' 10' and 10/1, via port 100N' 15' to R12'" 10' and 10/N etc Communicating arrangements though the air is
This example is referring to an implementation including means to performed in a seamless of a connectionless type of switching i e logically similar way (seen from 10') as when Ethernet, Fast Ethernet and/or Gigabit other transmission media would be used, Ethernet and other types of future standards in however with the rate and bandwidth adoptions this segment However, the basic principles envisaged in this document for wireless reviewed should be thought of be applicable if communication between WPs ATM switching functions where used at the Thus 10/1 includes means to act as a stations in stead switch/router between the switch/router 10' and its respective WPs Thus 10/1 includes means
Some of the reasons behind arranging the to act as a switch/router for traffic flows stations spliced is to apply switching capability between station 12 and 13 through 10/1 via next to remote typically located roof-top corresponding WPs mounting to scattered locations from a The switching performance of particularly common platform 10' as an example in a functions 10/1 , 10/2 etc are equipped for terminal room etc Allowing closely location to means that include fast switching between one or more WPs (and/or radio or laser WPs in particular I e in order to transfer means) close connected to antenna systems information that is routed through the network with seamless no or limited extra delay that
The functional description of 10/1 , 10/2 etc does not severely effects standard flows of could be described as the description of a data at least within a reasonable number of station etc I e switching and/or routing for air repeating steps in an area traffic as well as optional connections of Ups The functional unit 10/1 ,10/2 etc include etc would be applicable as is generally means for connecting the respective functional visualised in the figure unit 10/1 etc to user applications (illustrated by port 100 etc ) i e also as descnber visualised
The connections 1001 ' 100N' could for station 10, 11 etc in other figures generally be seen similar to 100, 101 , etc earlier described general station model as in Further resembles with earlier possible views figure 4 and 5 These ports 1001' etc could be of systems implementations Means are seen as an ordinary user port of a included to 10', 10/1 10/2 etc for the ability to switching/routing platform connecting the set-up, supervise and control, schematically scattered switches/routers 10/1 , 10/2 etc shown by 200/1 for a remote switched function where signalling between 10/1 , etc, and 10' is and/or 210 at WP or 200' for an integrated applied logically via standard communication solution at 10' Means are included to perform The connection 1001 ' etc may be based on these operations from any of the ports visualised including at virtually at any station The idea with this figure is to exemplify and and/or at external network functional unit 200". further explain possible use of various stations Means included management functions to be and configurations, how they are interrelated based on Simple Network Management and possible to use integrated with external protocols, SNMP, and/or future and/or added networks R10'" etc. enhancements of it.
In the example is one station 12 solely based
The functional units R10'", R11 '" etc. are on one switching function. Another sub-station considered to external connectionless 11/1 represents a sub switching functions networks. If ATM switching or combinations interrelated with another switch/router, 11 '. The where used (in stead of the Ethernet based port visualised on station 11 represent the switching) it could represent such networks. ability to connect users and terminate traffic at In addition communications services for circuit that port. I.e. means are included at subPSTN, DTM and/or ATM would be applicable stations for external applications similar to into this figure for transparent transmission etc. what has been described for station. as generally described in figure 7d. The square 9000 generally indicate stations and/or sub-stations, which are directly
Intercommunications between scattered W- switching and routing the wireless SENS is visualised. Which means that users communication traffic within an area. The connected under a port in station 17 could be square 10.000 generally visualise a in communication with a user connected at a comprehensive logical network (W-SENS). It port of station 11. could be seen as an approach, which serves a
Means for network planning, routing, number of users scattered in a specific communications set-up, supervision and geographical area including wireless switching control of one station function 10/1 , 10', services and/or connections to external corresponding WP and remote WPs is communications services. manageable via network management functions accessed via any of these functional Various types of means for network units. management set-up, control and supervision of See also explanations of the figures 17 and 18. W-SENS and applied external networks are generally visualised available at any of the
Figure 17a and b mentioned locations. This includes as well
The figures 17 a and b are generally means to logically access network visualising two examples of many other management functions, databases, etc. via possible building structures of stations in W- user ports as well. Like 200 at 10/1 or 200' at SENS approaches. Means including 10' or 200 at 12 or 200" at 10". Means for setinterrelated communication with each other up, control and supervise is applicable meaning that pair of WPs between of the two principally at any location. can establish and perform as been described in this document. Other types of building Figure 19 a and b and c structures than shown are of course The idea with figure 19 is to show one obtainable. example, of many possible solutions of
The figure 17 a) shows one station with a protocol applied for the transfer of digital bits switching functionality, which would be capable and byte structure on each carrier, sub-carrier of connecting a number of and various types of etc. WPs. Methods functions and means are included to
It shows how a number of WPs connected via include: 110-113 is applied to an antenna solution, ■ timing position co-ordination between sub- which contains a multiple beam arrangement carriers into various directions. A few other WPs are ■ timing positions for changing number of shown. I.e. typically one direction per WP sub-carriers applied connecting stations at different distances. ■ modulation level variation without interruption and/or loosing data transferred
The figure 17 b shows an example of a spliced • changes of levels of error corrections (by arrangement of switching functions of a station allowing variable extra transfer capacity to consisting of two scattered sub-stations be used) functions 10/1 , 10/2 connected to 10'. ■ time division multiple operation
■ frequency division multiple operation
Figure 18 ■ frequency shift without loosing and/or disturbing data transfer on carrier ■ frequency hopping repeatedly according a However is there is no need for putting any scheme without loosing and/or disturbing particular information in the arranged time data transfer segments visualised (S1 SxC1 etc.) then
■ timing positions as a basis for time frame continuous streams are transferred between structure realisations (i.e. applied for pair of WPs on such carriers and any data TDMA versions including guard, including signalling, user data etc. can be synchronisation, switch time of antenna applied on it. directions if dynamic spatial directions In such a case on such carriers may other would be applied) logical protocols for communication solely take care of the required transfer between the WPs.
A certain case would be to arrange Data blocks represented by D1SxC1 etc. communications between WPs ports include adoption to a size (number of bits, synchronously. I.e. synchronous bytes etc.) that would correspond to certain communication is established between ports number or size of data on standard data where a number of sub-carriers are set-up, packets and ATM cells transferred. certain frequencies are selected for transmission, a certain modulation level is setPrevious examples have generally shown up. I.e. this result in a transfer of a certain methods functions and means of arranging bandwidth and transfer capacity between WP transparently transfer capacity where capacity where the proposed protocol structures could etc. between WPs are repeatedly required by be used or ignored. Instead a logical protocol applying a timing order which could be cowould be applicable which including an ordinated between the multiple carriers overlayered structure on selected sub-carriers. irrespective of modulation levels error corrections selected etc. Considering as an
This would be applicable if a number a sub- example only multiple possible speed carriers where applied permanent or semi alternations even if when different speeds permanent without need to shift frequencies would be selected between sub-carriers, this under transactions etc. and/or if modulation should shift a certain time and preferable level where set constant and/or relatively intervals that repeatedly is occurring. Further constant. considering and examples of needs to shift
If on the other hand transfer capacity, frequency on sub-carrier (to create a hop in bandwidth, frequencies, etc. between each pair frequency due to a frequency hopping of WP are fairly often regulated this would be application between WPs or else) this should done seamlessly without any degradation repeatedly be possible. (which repeatedly would be applicable at every Data transfer over the air is normally applying increment of P1) error detection/error correction coding such coding is possible to repeatedly apply
The background for the means of applying a interleaved on streams of data. protocol of this type is to show communication Signalling between WPs are needed even possibilities of both IP and ATP, signalling and under normal conditions. Using as an example signal processing between any pair of WPs TDMA, guard time, synchronisation of operating under various conditions. incoming data, timing of the scattered WPs etc. A further reason is that it includes means for is typically needed the timing segment arranging communications for WPs organised visualised as S1SxC1 , S2..etc. is usable. in a P-MP mode. This includes means for Methods functions and means are applicable arranging various equipment resource-sharing to sub-carriers to include: scheme like FDMA or TDMA or CDMA or ■ guard timing, applying of synchronisation combinations. Exemplified by FDMA that information on transmitted bursts, needs changes in time slots FDMA needs ■ detection and synchronisation recovery of changes of sub-carriers regularly. received time fragments,
If the signalling segments increments The figure 19 a shows an example of separate visualised between P1 like S1SxC1 , S2SxC1 sub-carriers each carrying user data and/or etc. on channel 1 this certain segments is signalling. Methods functions and means usable for users data and or signalling, error including of: detection's error corrections etc. i.e. extra ■ Separate modulated sub-carriers capacity used besides the data blocks according to an FDM scheme D1 SxC1 , D2SxC1 etc. ■ OFDM channel arrangements with one or several groups sub-carriers (CH 1 , CH 2 CHn) each channels and each group apply data entered to WP for transmission occupying a certain bandwidths to a corresponding WP according to prioritised schemes
The number of selection of sub-carriers analyse of transfer capacity requirement of depending of each sub-channels appropriate data to be transferred between respective rate (modulation level) and the sum assigned WPs between the WPs for each particular hop analyse of transfer capacity requirement of real time and/or synchronous and/or
An example of structure is shown for data seamless synchronous transfers via WPs and/or data and/or signalling blocks of data, analyse data entered into WP from a (example fig 19 a) for CH2, D1SxC2 and switching function based on data protocols D2SxC2 etc ) The structure shown is including IP and various modifications understood to be consecutively repeatedly updates structured in time as indicated separate data which has to be prioritised to Co-ordination of timing between individual subbe transferred over WPs before other data channels is included An example of (i e exemplified by IP - packet applied arrangements and means of time co-ordination with prioritised protocols in order) between the sub-channels, irrespective of the analyse real time transfer requirement of modulation level, are shown in the figure 19 b) data which have to be virtually In the example are two channels (CH1 and transparently transferred via WPs CH2) shown to be modulated differently, i e analyse of transfer requirement of data where CH1 transferring half the number of bits which is can be asynchronously that is transferred on CH2 By including a transferred via WPs allocate transfer repeated time interval (P1 ) and selected this capacity between WPs in accordance to repetition to occur under a certain time where fulfil service requirements both could correspond to in time and to the allocate transfer capacity between actual signalling time period visualised for the parallel pair of WPs (organised in point-point mode sub-channels (example starting by the S1SxC2 and/or point-multipoint mode) to meet the and S1SxC1 etc ) Method functions and communication service requirement means are arranged to achieve an equal or between actual UP/sTPs seamless overlapping or equal repeated timing allocate transfer capacity between WPs to interval P1 which includes co-ordination at least correspond to the real time or between sub-channels as to allow frequency seamless real-time transfer shift, time division etc irrespective of the allocate transfer capacity between WPs for modulation level etc of sub-channels without data transfer which do not require real time necessarily loosing data transfer allocate transfer capacity between WPs at
Methods functions and means are included to least between WPs (sub-WPs) in point- apply timing intervals between the consecutive point mode including FDM and/or FDMA P1 s in order to and/or TDMA and/or CDMA mode of
■ arrange frame structure operation in point-multipoint mode, by
■ arrange time slot structures within frames assigning one and/or more carriers and/or
■ organise multi-frame time structure as sub-carriers (sub-channels) indicated by T01 , T02 TOz, T01 , , allocate transfer capacity between WPs at which is arranged when this is required least between WPs (sub-WPs) in point-
■ Arrange variable transfer capacities point mode including FDM and/or FDMA between one WP and more the one and/or CDMA by assigning modulation corresponding WP i e in a P-MP mode method and demodulation method on carrier and/or sub-carrier
Method functions and means are included to apply error detection codes to data support various communications procedures transmitted from one WP to another and between ports are measure the bit error rate performance
■ organise data entered into WP from packet adjust transfer capacity and/or balance it switching function in an asynchronous (like with transfer quality performance between Ethernet IP etc ) and/or synchronous WPs per carrier, by applying appropriate (circuit switching, like ATM, including DTM) froward error correction to data transfer to be applied to certain transfer capacity and correct data at the receiving end by between pair of WPs the use of selected applied error correction codes ■ include adjustment of regulation of ■ combination of blocks and/or signalling appropriate received radio transmission blocks for user data transfer capacity, level to include a balance to the signalling capacity, signalling processing modulation level used and/or the detected capacity - error detection, error correction error performance required between WPs by adjusting radio transmitter energy Various modulation levels are applicable
■ include dual direction signalling via one This is illustrated with an example Considering and/or multiple sub-carriers between WPs that a modulation method like 16 QAM were in order to adjust communication between used it and it transfer 4 data and 4 signal respective WPs in accordance to blocks (4 x DB64 + 4 x DB16) between any communication service requirement i e consecutive time increments, P1 , example including transfer capacity, Bit Error Rate T01 ,T02) If the capacity of a sub-channel was and transfer delay performance such that two frames T01 , T02 where representing 8 data blocks each representing
Carriers, sub-carriers etc are including 64 bytes these two time segments represents applicable adjustment capabilities to various totally 64 x 8 data bytes and the 4 x 8 multiplexing requirements based on timing signalling bytes The signalling bytes protocol (one type of many possible represents totally 5-6 % and it could include exemplified in figure 19) applied Transfer of the use for error correction If the error user data, signalling between stations, WPs, detection and error correction requires more etc, including selection of various capacity for capacity, a selected part and/or number of signal processing is applicable to be mixed to such data block of 64 bytes could be used in meet transfer capacity and quality addition per frame (T01) and/or multi-frame requirements for each pair of WPs (T01 , T02 etc ) arrangements I e if one of the 8 data blocks where used an additional 12
Mixed signal processing and data include % is added to the 5 to 6 % for the signalling ability to repeatedly transmitted in blocks (like processing Other combinations are of course SISxCn, DI SxCn, S2SxCn, D2SxCn etc applicable by selecting other number of within T01 , T02 etc I e where a number of segments blocks could correspond to the number of bits In the mentioned example above are 16 QAM transmitted between each time specified as modulation considered If QPSK modulation P1 where used, half of the numbers of bytes could be transferred in each time segment, but it may
If as an example of size of blocks one so- require less bandwidth for correction of data called data block (DI SxCn) consists of 64 transferred I e such examples of variations of bytes (DB64) and if a so-called signalling block modulation levels are schematically (SISxCn) consisting of 4 bytes, (DB16) If data demonstrated in figure 19 b, but with transfer where structured like this such maintained consecutive time increments of P1 signalling block represents about 5-6 % of CH1 could represent a transfer rate based on each sub-channels transmission speed QPSK and CH2 could represent a speed of 16 capacity QAM modulation etc The type of modulation demonstrated, timing and sizes of data
Method functions and means include respective signalling blocks, transfer rate on combining number of and types of data blocks carrier etc where only meant to show applied on carriers, sub-carriers for principles and examples for demonstration
■ transfer of data in blocks corresponding to purpose only it could of course be different in rapid and effective transfer of user data implementations etc blocks including short IP packet's from 64 bytes size Methods functions and means including transfer of ATM cells of 53 bytes including application of signalling and or signal additional error protection coding up to at processing data etc on separate sub-channels least 64 bytes from sub-channels carrying typically user data
■ transfer of signalling information and or is applicable in addition to include it on same users data in data and/or signalling blocks sub-carriers as previously described
■ use of a time segment of a certain numbered of interleaved signalling data Method functions and means including blocks is applicable to correspond to a ■ OFDM used and apply data and signal common timing P1 for sub-carriers applied processing in accordance to previous possible description ■ Applying data signalling error detection Figure 20 and/error corrections to evolving ETSI Is visualising a realisation of various virtual Hiperlan standards presently based on a station functionality's in addition to the W- group 64 of sub-channels operable within SENS stations described by adding certain less than 20 MHz of total frequency WPs which virtually are able to create such bandwidth station functionality's in combination with
■ Applying groups of modem functions station other functionality I e to reside in where each modem including an parallel to other stations and/or WP functions occupying about 20 MHz and/or different described for point-point and/or point - bandwidth and/or 64 sub-channels in each multipoint mode transmission capability) in this group document Physical and logical realisation of
* including variable modulation levels on the virtual station including adaptation to various sub-channels and/or groups of subwirelesses accesses standards Methods channels functions and means includes the possibilities to use methods functions and means
Methods functions and means includes described in this document and in addition add applicability to vary the multiples of groups of specific WPs for the appropriate standard and OFDM modulated sub-carriers functions to appropriate software configuration which operate in parallel operation, i e to select an include to reside on processing functional unit appropriate number of groups at an selected (566/1 (or alike) appropriate modulation level to achieve a selected transfer rate between pairs of WPs is The figure illustrates stations 10, 11 , 12 and applicable 17, 18 as stations considered equipped with
If one group of sub-carriers of a modem set WPs (sub-WPs) arrange for transparent could deliver up to about 50 Mbit/s per 20 synchronous point-point communications MHz, based on a 64 QAM modulation scheme arrangements between stations and/or similar per sub-channel, four such groups of modems arranged for point-multipoint arrangements could deliver up 200 Mbit/s In addition is visualised a realisation of a I e within less than 80 MHz and eight groups Virtual Wireless Access (VWA) system could deliver 400 Mbit/s on 160 MHz connected at stations 12 as a central (or base) bandwidth VWA12 The central station connect a number of station 13, 15, 14 in point - multipoint mode
The actual communication between WPs These stations are able to virtually acting as as including the station functions is applicable to terminals (VWA 14, VWA 15) in addition meet existing and/or evolving co-existing station VWA13 is additionally designed to work and/or interoperability standards in the wireless as a repeater (with add/drop capability of user area is included Both as WP are used as traffic shown by VW100 1010), for the terminal multiple transmission means between stations VWA 16 and/or when WPs and station functionality's The station VWA13 is applicable to operate as are integrated with software functions so as to a central by WP 551 , which communicated virtually create emulation of stations in wireless with VWA16 and other stations typically below access systems to reside on stations in W- the line of sight to allow access towards SENS VWA12
I e VWA station which either operate as
Thus, variable possible air interfaces is central, terminal and repeater, i e similar to a applicable to be included derivable from the wireless access is applicable by the use of the optional means of the basic arrangements of methods functions and means basically transfer of user data, signalling and coding in explained for the W-SENS sub-channels I e virtually are one or more Should such functions be required it would be systems for fixed point to point wireless applicable by assigning appropriate functioning communication, point-multipoint system and/or WPs for such functions virtually in any number multipoint arrangements applicable for fixed at any station In addition a WP organised to and/or mobile wireless solutions including operate as central exemplified at station 12 TDMA and/or FDMA and/or CDMA and/or W- would include connection to the switching CDMA applicable, including a spatial SDMA function visualised as 2BS i e utilising the approach should it be needed actual stations switching functionality it is In addition variable kind of proprietary air operating on and/or any of the W-SENS protocols is applicable to be included in parallel stations In addition it is included possible at any station connection to external switching/routing functions schematically illustrated by 1000 In order to fully make it possible to utilise an « connect appropriate WPs to stations and available investment in transmission realise stations to operate as if they where equipment efficiently a WPs include both the stations in a wireless access system ability to work as a central station and an coping with appropriate standards for underlying station in P-MP modes these and/or such stations interaction with I e an investment in a WP including transmitter other switching and/or routing systems and receiving equipment which is operating under a central WP together with a number of The dotted lines 511 , 512 are schematically other WPs This means that its capacity may meaning to show that various air interface not be fully utilise towards the central and as protocols may be applied and operate in such if it should be able to use the remaining accordance to any wireless communication transmit and receive capacity with other WPs standard and/or proprietary standard considerable a cost savings could be applicable with an enhanced switching and/or Figure 22 routing capability In addition a WP which could The idea with figure 22 is to demonstrate and be considered as underlying to more than one exemplify effects by using the method (W- central WP is possible to utilise for improved SENS) and appropriate parts of sub-methods, redundancy and more efficient use of implemented into some exemplified system investment etc variations in this patent application It is visualised how very high capacity
Method functions and means are included for switching/routing functions at stations could WPs organised to operate in P-MP mode in support to perform possible alternative order to connect stations and switching transparent flow of data between stations via functions in such a way as WPs Each assigned WP to a station includes
■ A WP working as central for other WPs, a transfer capacity and a selection of possible sharing its capacity with a number of transfer capacity, which is typically much less "underlying" WPs, such underlying WPs than the total switching function capacity at the include functions and means being able to same station commonly share its capacity with the central (VWA12, 551/VW2) In order to simplify the presentation of W-
■ A WP, which is sharing its capacity with SENS are the strengths with the method other stations (example 551 towards VWA exemplified by the use of a fairly simple type of 12), working as an underlying WP to VW12 station fig 22 a It is equally structured, limited include functions and means to share its to four station connections in various directions transmission recourse capacity with other where WPs are arranged for point-point stations (example VW21 ) as a central communication Station is in this example is
■ A WP which is working as an underlying limited to being able to connect four other station towards a central includes ability to stations and directions to simplify the work as an underlying to other central WPs explanations
The figure is showing an idealised and/or theoretical structure in form of a star network
Figure 21 topology applied for each station
The W-SENS type of network is a new network approach, however the possible use of various Figure 22 a is indicating a general model communications ports (WPs) (in fact in parallel saying that if every "layer-level" of stations can on the same station) makes it possible to apply connect another "layer" of station The higher WPs to meet various wireless communications the levels of stations connected the higher the protocols should this be required sum of the possible numbers of stations that This would be the case for simple co-existence can potentially co-operatively transfer standards often used for fixed wireless and information for users in the area eventual interoperability standards (fixed In the table below the figure 22 a) this is further and/or mobile) to allow interconnection of explained various manufactures terminals to one This use of the method and selected sub- manufactures base station methods is shown that even with a possibility to connect a limited number of stations (in the
Methods functions and means are included to example here 4) a tremendous high number of ■ connect a WP to one station and virtually stations can be interrelated to each other work as a standard terminal to another Methods functions and means are included to manufactures base station switching/routing traffic rapidly through stations that results in transfer delays for users that in practice would be possible to neglect per quality (however, not taken into account any switching stage including a reasonable number eventual added overhead that are added for of such stages signal processing)
As an example switching delay assumed to be less than about one and/or a few The results of the "automatic" potentially microseconds per station would allow a shortening of the radio (or laser) hop length seamless transparent flow in principle reduces fading margin requirement further neglecting the numbers of stations in any local significantly for wireless communication and/or regional area As such one specifically in humid climates Thus the microsecond is referred to about 300 m of methods functions and means for balance propagation delay through the air, i e this and required quality, modulation level, signal even delays which would be much higher is processing etc included to optimise W-SENS possible to neglect solution described in this document in areas is In practical communications system improving with a growing number of stations implementation figures of higher 10, 20, 30 or and in fact users This leads to a self- more would still be possible to ignore generating positive effect on capacity and quality in a given area and on a given
Methods functions and means to support the frequency spectrum the more users that are expansion of networks and switching/routing possible to serve options with every new station added into new Transfer rates at specific selected sites and/or is included by improve of frequency re-use are improved in a
■ visioning and/or managing selected part of an area switching/routing selections via network management tools (see also fig 28), The general possible reduction of hop lengths
■ arrange alternative switching and/or that could lead to increasing number of routing based on the network topology in stations in an area would further make it an area to achieve appropriate possible to lower the price on radio heads as communications services in terms of less and less power would be required to transfer capacity and/or quality and transmitted to maintain capacity In addition connectivity availability higher an higher radio frequencies would be applicable (including laser) In a situation like a
An increased number of stations would with city network or a campus network etc with such means included, make it possible to many users station in a limited area are an generally shorten hop lengths between increase number of station density leading to stations, thus including possible reduce radio an increased ability to use laser transmission power and/or adopt to alternative communication which opens up huge modulation level etc as the hop lengths is frequency spectrum resources which does not getting shorter require and licence
This in turn improve the frequency re-use Gradually as a W-SENS network is getting capability of frequency spectrum (which means increased with a number of stations means for that the more stations applied the more improve the possible transfer rate, the capacity stations can be added and the higher the and maintain or improve quality applies potential capacity is getting) Means to improve possibilities to increase Figure 22 b shows an example of a scenario of transfer capacity between pair of WPs are an expanded network over time to illustrate the applicable when hops are shortened effects of implementations of a W-SENS An example of this effect is that a maintained approach transmission power level and a reduction of the hop lengths to half the distance results in a The figure shows how network and stations gain of 6 dB over noise As an example the interrelation is changed as new stations are difference between a carrier to noise figure of added It is also the meaning to visualise how QPSK and a modulation level like 16 QAM is routing alternatives are increased the more that double transfer capacity of 16QAM leads stations available to a required increase of signal over noise The dotted lines are visualising established about 6-7 dB hops being potentially possible to gradually
I e the increased signalling level is applicable disconnect as visualised by 300x and 300y At to be used to increase transfer rate By initially stages may long hops (between station changing the modulation level from QPSK to 10 and 11 hop 300 etc ) normally be required 16 QAM a doubling of the transfer rate would This could as an example require WPs to be in principle be applicable at about maintained equipped mainly for radio transmission in appropriate frequency bands as generally Methods functions and means are included to indicated by 300 between stations 10, 11 etc connect stations equipped with WPs requiring less and less radiated power the denser the
As a network is getting denser laser WPs, stations are located and/or very high frequency radios and/or very low power radio heads (highly integrated and Methods functions and means are included to low cost) would be applicable This is generally ■ use short range high transfer speed visualised by, 10x etc , meaning the ability to communications devices WPs applied on applying an increasing amount of stations that stations are of different type then originally required for ■ expand network area coverage gradually a W-SENS network approach I e the degree in size by using short range WPs by of such stations is expanding in relation to applying fast switching/routing capabilities those initially applied the denser the network is ■ combine use of WPs including long hop getting and the lower the cost for each new capabilities for rapid large W-SENS station network area coverage's and the use of
In dense structures is the ability to connect gradual expansion of W-SENS network even more users via the wireless W-SENS realisations of area coverage and/or network increasing as the probability to capacity connect more stations is increasing with every new station superseding obstacles, hoses Figure 23 threes etc The network structure leads in fact The idea with this figure is to show an to more advantages the more stations which in additional routing alternative complementary to fact actual would drive the network to expand figure 15 The combination of using laser and into as many possible applications as possible radio carriers for the various WPs in order to i e ability to connect end users into homes, combine radio and license free high bandwidth apartments, offices, indoor, outdoor etc spectrum based on very narrow beams of light This could further increase the demand for an wave or near the frequency of light waves increasing number of use of WPs arranged for P-MP transfer applicable as the full transfer Multiple WPs are visualised applicable for capacity P-P WPs capability may not be connecting stations to each other to increase needed the closer to the user a W-SENS transfer capacity and/or improve the security network is getting and/or connection transfer capacity and
I e the more the requirement the more bandwidth availability These WPs may be powerful are the W-SENS network getting based on radio and/or light-wave frequencies or around these typically used for laser
The figure 22 b is describing a scenario with a growing number of stations along the time Communication directly between station 10 At time 1 visualised may be to connect some and 11 is shown to applying one pair of WPs few users wirelessly at fairly distant away from based on radio and the other on laser It could a network node point connected to a fibre as an example also be a number of pairs of backbone passing a city, sub-urban region etc WPs using the same radio band (but different frequency it not appropriate spread spectrum
The scenario at time 2 is meaning to visualise technologies where applied, i e frequency how a considerable number of stations have hopping and/or channel coding) or using totally been connected It is visualised that the hop different frequency bands between the WPs length is relatively shorted than originally in Method functions means includes addition many more potential places occur ■ application of more than one WP at where traffic could be dropped and/or inserted stations to arrange communication with a to an existing fibre backbone which could corresponding set of WPs at another offload traffic trough the air if required in order station to improve the spectrum efficiency further ■ arrange traffic information transfer between any selected UPs and/or TPs etc
The scenario at time 3 meaning to show an to be transferred via more than one WP even denser station structures where many more users are connected As the network One of the reason for this is to make it possible increases into density are also the use of new to use both high bandwidth high transfer rate stations for low power radiation, high frequency communication at least on one pair of ports (including laser) applicable and to use at least one pair of lower speed WPs working in parallel and/or taking and further possible route I e ports 1000 of stations 10 and 11 could communicate via the ■ regulate power connect or disconnect paralleled arranged WPs (beams 320, 315) or respective WPs in accordance is applied via the other route via station 13 (321 ,316, ■ control polarisation of antennas 323,317) ■ apply cross polarised and/or single
As previously been described method polarised transfer functions and means to utilise alternative traffic routes in parallel independent of the various Methods functions and means are included for distances is included WPs to In addition any of the possible pair of WP ■ be arranged full port transparent connections between stations could be deleted communication capacity between stations and WPs which could offer properly transferred at least based on connectionless switching quality could be selected as an example if functions quality degrades etc I e utilising very high ■ include ability to be arranged for capacity frequency radio bands and/or laser etc which transparency in correspondence to could offer very high bandwidth and transfer standard port (UP/TP) based on standard capacity under normal conditions under long rates used on Ethernet standards periods is applicable These is applicable to be ■ use of WPs including transparent 10 Mbit/s combined with WPs operating on lower radio and/or semi-duplex and or duplex 100 frequencies typically on less bandwidth Mbit/s and/or duplex 1000 Mbit/s available thus offering lower transfer rates but ■ transparency assignment of transfer with much higher probability of availability to capacity between ports including secure the communication assignment of capacity permanently to the Methods functions and means includes corresponding bit rate of any of the selection of both bandwidth (i e number of standard ports sub-channels) modulation level on carriers, ■ transparency assignment of transfer transmission power level adjustments etc are capacity between ports includes in addition applicable to maintain availability assignment of capacity to the rate of any of when the (air) environment course the standard ports rates under periods degradation when each selective pair of WP have to be used for transfer
Sensitivity to transfer quality degradation ■ methods functions and means are included effected by air environment increases with to assign and/or disconnect up to the full longer hops and higher frequencies As an capacity of any standard port used example only a few km could be considered to between WPs deliver appropriate quality (i e in the range of include available means to set-up transfer about 99 99%) when radio frequencies utilised capacity in forms of bandwidth, carriers for in the range of 30-50 GHz, specifically in wet, seamless directly (to avoid set up delay worm and humid climates for high speed broad less of data etc ) bandwidth digital transmission using ■ including means to maintain signalling reasonable transmission power level capacity between ports which virtually is Using laser the full availability (exemplified by not allocated 99 99 % etc ) may only be applicable for hops ■ including means to shift assignment of less than a few 100 meters transparent capacity via WPs between However, laser may offer a perfect quality standard rates i e between 10 Mbit/s, 100 during 80-90% of a long time period over Mbit s and 1000 Mbit/s longer hops (few km etc ) which may be include available means to estimate the utilised offering a licence free high bandwidth time which the full transparent capacity solution under long periods shall be allocated
Methods functions and means for pair of WP in As an example, in the case of using high communication includes frequency units with narrow beams large
■ supervising of transfer quality, available bandwidths applications using laser
■ variation capability of bandwidth could be arranged for full bandwidth and/or a
■ variation capability to select modulation fixed transparent communication capacity level, between WPs and arranged where seamless
■ regulate the strengths of the error transparent port - port communication correction (based on quality performance between switching functions would be measured in accordance to specified applicable Even without any specific quality requirement) bandwidth allocation intelligence etc necessarily needed which simplifies such WPs application located under selected stations and
Figure 24 user ports Such traffic is meant to be possible
The idea with this figure is to demonstrate a in parallel to other types of connections for possible scenario of many possible to occur in example to internally in W-SENS switch traffic reality The W-SENS is at multiple selected between stations and ports stations showed applied via 1000 to another backbone network 1055, here supposed to be Figure 25 a a fibre-based solution Thus this would include The idea with this figure is to demonstrate the possibilities to route traffic and terminate at multiple inherent built in capabilities in highly redundant locations, including offload of the air dense station environment in W-SENS by terminate traffic at nearest backbone (fibre, approaches etc ) as it may be applicable Fibre backbone ring solutions include often ability to access The "A" in upper left hand is visualising radio traffic from either side of the ring at add/drop communication between two stations, 11a and locations to improve availability TP 12a Only one antenna beam direction 320A is arrangements at W-SENS stations include shown as mentioned earlier in the document means to add/drop traffic between fibre and W- (to simplify drawings) A corresponding figure SENS ports in order to route traffic to either at the top right hand side is visualising a fibre ring direction certain transfer capacity, 11-12C, applied at a selected bandwidth modulation level and
Methods functions and means is included to transfer rate at a certain transmission quality,
■ handle alternative redundant routing Each station 11a and 12b have the possibility capability on fibre rings at the connections to be expanded to more stations, directions, point between W-SENS stations and fibre improving the transfer capacity in total through backbones such station, i e by assigning WPs and
« traffic drop/insert at W-SENS ports 100, establish new communications routes to other 100' etc to fibre ring based on standard stations This is generally visualised by the communications protocols like relevant IP dotted lines 11 ax, 12, ax standards, SDH, SONET, ATM, DTM standards Etc including ability to allocate The figure left below "a" represents a station connection to the appropriate available 13a to be applied between the previously route mentions stations 11a, 12a To simplify
■ traffic drop/insert of multiples of stations explanation the new station is assumed placed (W-SENS) forming network that in the middle between the two originals Now transferring information between each the radio transmission power can be other station and UP/TP is including ability decreased about 6 dB with maintained quality to selectively terminate air traffic at and modulation level for the hops, 320a, 320b selected stations where deemed In fact it could also result in better transfer appropriate to improve security and/or quality performance between 11a and 12a than offload use of frequency spectrum and/or was possible over one hop with double hop other reasons lengths because the probability of availability of a hop length reduced by half is normally
Alternative selection of termination point is increasing the availability factor more than half schematically shown for an implemented W- In fact are in principal are the availability factor SENS approach This is visualised by station for distances, d, dependency for radio 12 which traffic could be wholly or partly routed transmission solutions influenced by a factor via station 21 and/or terminated at station 20 considered in the range d1 5"3 Thus the as station 12 and 21 is shown to schematically unavailability factor for a hop is strongly able to establish communication if required via dependent on the hop lengths and is the dotted line 307/316, indicating laser and/or increasing with wet climates, flatness etc radio transfer
The exemplified increased ratio between signal
An external switching/routing solution to the W- to noise carrier and the increased availability SENS is visualised by 12'", another is 1001 In factor would be possible to utilise in order to the example given are these connected to a increase transfer capacity between respective fibre backbone, 1055 It is anticipated that WPs This is possible by changing the multiple users in the envisaged W-SENS modulation level I e as an example if QPSK implementation shown could support multiple modulation where used at first 16 QAM connections transparently between the said modulation on carriers, sub-carriers would external switching/routers and the respective double the transfer rate between stations This would be the case when the same radio and possible increased hiding of stations (via transmitter power level and antennas for the an increased number of obstacles the shorter short as for the long hop are used Up to about the hops and the closer to the user) in a W- a doubling of the original transfer rate would be SENS network feasible at about a similar quality and in the examples shown However, the actual In fact if the beams 320A, 320a-c, 13b-a is increased transfer capacity would be separated from each other with enough depending in addition on the many variable antenna isolation, conventional modulation different modulation methods that is selected methods (i e not spread spectrum coded) between, applied capacity for forward error would be applicable occupying overlapping correction which may vary for different frequency spectrum Thus, the aggregated modulation methods, frequency bands, climate capacity transfer between station 11a and 12a zones and geographical topography at each would be possible, not only as two alternate location routes, but also to increase the transfer
The hop length has generally a considerable capacity between ports at station 11a and 12a strong influence on the overall quality In addition as shown in fig 25 a) the transfer performance for wireless communication in rate between 11a-13b and 13b 12a could be comparison to other factors Reducing it increased thus the new route via the shorter generally would improve significantly improve hops could offer a higher transfer capacity than the use of wireless even and specifically for the corresponding between 11a - 12a on a electromagnetic frequencies above the radio given frequency spectrum bands
In addition the shorter the hops the more Figure 26 possible variations in elevations are and the The figure above shows stations which are more likely shadows by obstacles are based on connectionless switching functions occurring which would increase the quality (packet structures, IP protocol based etc ) and from interference further I e the more station stations based on circuit oriented switching the better probability for delivering very high functions based on ATM switching transfer capacity One example of methods functions and means
Shown for case "a", the selection between the arranged for possible integration between the modulation methods discussed is visualised to two types is exemplified potentially about double transfer rate, which is generally indicated by the figure to the right Generally are WPs (normally 550) shown as a Between stations 12a and 13a is the capacity separated in a transmit section 554 and a shown to be 11-12C1 (comparable to 11-12C receive section 553, indicating a transparent for case "A") and added equal capacity 11- flow of data at a selected bandwidth and 12C2 Between stations 12a and 13a is equally transfer capacity in either direction of a WP the capacity 13-12C1 (comparable to 11-12C) Stations are shown equipped with WPs used and 12-12C2 showing a doubled transfer for transfer of data packets like IP etc for capacity synchronous, seamless synchronous, and/or asynchronous transfers In addition WPs adopted for point-point and/or point-multipoint
Figure 25 b transferring ATM cells between stations based
This figure is generally visualising that the on ATM switching functions applicable for occupied spectrum per hop would be transfer of data based on synchronous, significantly decreased by the use of reduced seamless synchronous and or asynchronous hop length if the same transfer quality and port standards transfer capacity were concerned for the new shorter hops In the case of using ATM switching and
The rectangles represents the average applying Ethernet ports for transfer at least spectrum area occupation (on way) and the WPs includes methods functions and means dotted lines (triangle) is schematically to visualising radiation occupation of a main lobe ■ analyse data applied on ATM cells which of a directed antenna have to be transferred
■ at least conversion UP/TP connecting to
Figure 25 c ATM switch function include ability to
This figure is illustrating a possible further convert Ethernet packets into cells improvement of transfer capacity on a limited ■ data on ATM cells entering into a WP for frequency bandwidth It illustrates the use of transfer to a corresponding WP is relatively increase of variations of elevations detectable in terms of addressing and/or in terms of transfer priority
■ transfer data between WPs which is higher Alternatively are these lobes controllable in prioritised before specific selected direction in selected time
■ mechanism to detect transfer rate fragment if time division would be applied requirements at WPs
■ mechanism to assign transfer capacity Via the generally visualised antenna system is
■ mechanism to apply ATM cells on shown to offer solutions in the geographical allocated carrier and/or carriers for tensfer area schematically indicated to 331 I e the to corresponding WP possible area, which could be served and the appropriate transmission power regulation to
For connectionless type of switching assigned each hop etc is shown applied by the variable WP capacity is shown as 5541 respective 5531 antenna lobe sizes indicated I e station 11 is and for ATM as 554A and 553A further away than station 17 The use of the same figure of the flows It is estimated that lobes which point to an between the WPs does not mean that it is or overlapping direction is separated in either has to be the same frequency, bandwidth, frequency and/or coding for continuous capacity etc streams of data between stations or in time for burst communication not to interfere
The possible selectable transfer rate between In figure 29 is also shown complementary in any transmit or receive direction of the WPs information (to this figure description) about are visualised by 4003 and 3003 possible means of arranging communication
Station 10 shows a possible adaptive Some of many possible antenna system interconnectivity point between stations based solutions would be to use a set of antennas on packet switching and/or ATM switching by using common reflectors with applicable the use of a specific WP adopted for distribution and/or switching arrangements communication with a stations (19) based on Alternatively phased array antennas supporting ATM switching functions the possible use of multiple antenna beams each beam being applicable to use for one WP
Further are shown capabilities of assigning and/or sub-WP, each beam controllable in Ethernet, ATM or/and standard interfaces used direction in the telecommunication, and/or media distribution environment, J-PEG etc Figure 27 b
Shows a similar situation as the previous
Figure 27 a, b, c, d, antenna system In this case however it is
The idea with these figures is to demonstrate considered that each WP is to be connected to method functions and means of antenna an antenna lobe that each works in its specific arrangements for stations, WPs and/or sub- direction The antenna system would be WPs arranged by selected directed antennas, either
What is said here about antennas include not single fixed antenna, parabolic, horns etc only radio but also corresponding optical Alternatively is the use of a common reflector means for transmit and/or receive laser or for multiple horns considered By using light-wave communication in one and/multiple multiple WPs the required area coverage or directions direction is selected
Thus is this case is direction controlled by the
Figure 27 a digital switching traffic between the WP and
The figure 27a is exemplifying a station, the other ports The possible area cover is
10/10/1 etc equipped with a number of WPs visualised to 332
(550') each connected to a transmitter/receiver and via a filter to an antenna system 581* It is Figure 27 c visualised Shows a general example of methods
■ a number of main lobes are possible to functions and means for sharing either radio locate in parallel in wanted directions for and/or inclusive or modem and communicate each of the WPs and/or sub-WPs in various directions including spatial
■ any WP may select directions which may arrangement either by shifting directions in overlap in area and time with another time or to selectively handle multiple directions parallel WP thus requiring either in parallel The area coverage is generally separation in frequency and/or time shown to be 333 segments if applied Time-sharing as equipment resource sharing less capacity A total capacity is this case principle is applicable A radio head, 568/569, spliced exemplified by FB4, FB8 etc is shown to be shared via the functional unit RSW It include capability to arrange at least a Figure 28 an antenna lobe in a wanted direction in Methods functions means included is to selected time by switching between antenna ■ set-up basics at installation time, lobe directions in time which means to use one ■ bandwidth transfer capacity between WPs, radio to be switched in multiple directions to capacity allocation principles, communicate with other WPs in P-MP mode ■ re-configure, Time sharing by the use of switching an WP ■ define routing alternatives, including modem with other WPs required ■ set quality performance, switching on intermediate level, ISW I e the ■ supervising, intermediate switch is selecting a radio head « WP performance, per direction and time transfer quality performance between UPs/TPs etc etc etc
Using spatial communication but with ■ detect transfer capacity used by individual continuous flows of data transfer between WPs users the switching capability mentioned above is • apply billing solutions applicable principally by replacing the switching arrangements with an appropriate I e this have been schematically been power distribution arrangement described here is basically included reachable The indication PDS means here a power and controllable via network management distribution functional unit on radio frequency functions band and IDS means a similar power This figure is generally showing an example of distribution arrangement on intermediate one of many possible visions of an frequency bands implemented system via a network
Methods functions and means to communicate management system arrangement In the in various directions includes intermediate example given may include information about frequencies distribution and/or switching It stations that are connected with each other via would include the use of practical and low cost WPs, frequencies are occupied, transfer rate - implementations I e distribution and/or bandwidth allocation per pair of WPs, quality switching is applied on performance, power regulation, routing,
■ a limited frequency band redundancy etc
■ a fairly low frequency band (to a limited cost) allow for a flexible and often In principal are means for set-up practical suitable separation arrangements, supervision and control is
■ low transmission losses between WP and controllable from various ports, including via modems on one hand and radio heads and UPs/TPs of any station antennas
« flexible low cost intermediate cabling Figure 29 a b c d
■ application of multiple low power radios The figure shows complementary means for directly integrated to antenna feeder - sharing arranging a WP and variable modem reduces unnecessarily power dissipation capability, by part capacity, FB, or up to full on radio frequency level modem capability FBx, in various directions
Figure 27 d Figure 29 a) shows a time division splice via an
The idea here is to generally visualise an intermediate frequency switch ISW (for TDMA additional example of methods functions and or TDMA/SDMA or TDM/TDMA) means possible to include A WP at a modem 552/567/FB operating in parallel in a number of Figure 29 b) shows an example of spatial radio-heads, 568/569, in selected directions by arrangement where the power of one modem, antenna system 581 b The communication FB, is distributed to multiple antennas pointing resources are applicable to be spliced into in required selected direction as a seamless multiple virtual Sub-WPs FDMA/SDMA alike application per WP or The area coverage is shown to be 334 multiple virtual WPs if the modem is spliced Also note that an additional arrangement into more then one FB visualised in figure 6 is applicable The creation of a number of sub-WP 550/1 could Figure 29 c and d shows a similar situation be seen as a virtual WP but work typically with where the resource is shared or combined in a similar way but this time on a radio frequency ■ analyse priority of assigned data to be level transferred
■ control selection of air interfaces
Figure 29 e is finally visualising a general ■ control communications and transfer model of possible means for a W-SENS based assignments with a corresponding station which contains directional control functional unit on a corresponding station digitally, performed via 10/10710/1 etc and WP between the WPs Means for internal direction ■ supervise traffic performance control of WP communicating with more than ■ supervise transfer quality between WP one WP at various locations via intermediate « control error correction/modulation level frequency and/or radio frequency using ■ create multiple virtual station function of an frequency or time division and/ or frequency access station division Means for such equipment resource sharing methodology is being established for Method functions and means for virtual communications connections between multiple emulation of required functions of 566/1 at switches This communications arrangements different location is included if such processing includes in addition similar set-up, control and unit is physically applied at an WP, sub-WP or supervisory arrangement as have been not Thus making it possible for one functional described for WPs arranged in pairs mainly processing unit to control more than one WP at One example of a WP which radio the same station and/or for one stations transmission functional parts is shared is functional unit 566/1 to virtually act for another visualised by one 551z, corresponding to 29 c stations selected WPs as its own functional Another alternative would be to use any other unit In addition create other multiple logical alternative of means mentioned or to combine stations functions and air protocols together the different WPs mentioned in 29 a - d, with appropriate means on WPs sub-WPs etc inclusive figure 6
The functional processing unit 566/1 is included with means for supervision and/or
Figure 30 control, which is physically shown accessible
The idea with this figure is to visualise methods via port 210, 210' and/or virtually via any other functions and means in WPs and a pair of WPs network management port 200, 200' and/or under communication is therefore another station and/or virtually via user ports schematically visualised In the cases user ports are access network
A WP contains at least a port for connections management functionality's of W-SENS to and from another switch/router function stations, WPs, UPs, TPs etc at least selected and/or other network and/or ports to the air data is accessible dependent on authority connected for communication to and from Methods functions and means on network another WP at another station, T300 management applied for W-SENS include represents the Wireless Port Air Transmit, ■ authorisation, based on passwords
WPAT ■ selection on individual authorisation
At the corresponding WP i e the receive side ■ selection of groups authorisation
R 300 is called WPAR ■ selection of functions level authorisation
Similar acronyms are used for the opposite direction At least in the case of using connectionless xxxxxxxx communication and switching means for handling communication between paired WPs
Methods functions and means includes and 566/1 and their communication with WPs to set communicate with another WP via respective switch side is including processing functional unit 566/1 to ■ IP addressing of logical units in W-SENS » controlling possible selection of ■ Fast switching/routing at least for data WP transmission rate by assigning subswitched data transfer channels and/or transfer rate per sub■ MAC level based addressing/switching channel, ■ IPv 4, and/or IP v 6 signalling applicable
■ supervise quality performance of and other versions like rsip, nat etc information transfer over the air
■ perform remote control and supervise of appropriate speed selection based on Figure 31 a b c transfer requirement between each pair of These figures are visualising methods ports, functions and means of various station
■ transfer quality supervision and control arrangements Some examples of modular expansion under one or more W-SENS networks can capability, capacity expansion, gradual communicate via increase number or WPs, ports, functionalities are basically shown in the figures DSW in the figure generally refers to digital switching between beam elevations in point-
Equipping a station include application of at point mode Intermediate switching and or least a switching functional unit of a station, at power distribution ISW/IDS Radio frequency least a processing functional unit, at least one switching and/or distribution RSW/PDS I e applied WP, at least one UP and/or TP if traffic refers to possible selections of antenna beams has to be dropped or inserted and/or managed elevation in P-MP mode These include Here it is called 10/10,0/10/1 protocols for FDM and/or TDM and/or FDMA Such structure is applicable to allow for simple and/or TDMA, This including spatial installations with gradual expansion communication or not (fig 29) It includes capabilities in capacity, ports, functionality and possible realisation of virtual wireless access new WPs (sub-WPs) for new directions etc station functionality as central and/or terminal It contains at least a possible connection of a WP, at least one port for termination to either Figure 31 b, c 10/10/1 or 10' or 10" further means for gradual This figures complement the figure 31 a and expansion of more directions by arranging new visualise methods functions and means for WPs via connection of a functional unit called establishing point - multipoint operation 10,1 organised by a WP and/or sub-WP including
Thus multiple functional units may be « establishment of communication transfer principally identical structured to 10/10,0, 10/1 capacity between one WP with more than which allow a basic station unit it self to be one other WP further expanded into more directions, capacity ■ using equipment resource sharing of either etc a WP inclusive modem function and/or in
Methods functions and means for arranging addition using the sharing of radio heads functional unit similar to 10/10/1 which in its for communication between one and turn could assign a group of functional units multiple other WPs like 10/10,0/10/1 is applicable as an example This arrangement include establishment of when many directions and/or station have to transfer capacity of various transfer speeds be possible to assign from a location between WPs establishing communication with more then one other WP i e in P-MP mode of
Thus such station is designed for being able to operation transfer higher capacity in many more These P-MP modes of operation include directions via one and/or an number of WPs methods functions and means for WPs which could be connected to each basic ■ frequency (like no of sub-carriers selected station units 10/10,0/10/1 and modulation level)
■ time (time segments in bursts at least from
As an example of many other possible many in the direction to the shared WP on implementations strategies and building overlapping frequencies) structures are shown An initial implementation ■ code (like operation on overlapping could be done by a) (10/10,0/10/1) which is frequencies where channels of data possible to expand to b) (10,1 ) an another information is applied and modulated on basic unit -with or without switching carriers including codes unique for each functionality and/or processing functional unit data channel to allow for carrying multiple This can be further being expanded gradually data channels on overlapping frequency into more units bands, CDMA, W-CDMA etc )
If it needed or foreseen from beginning that ■ frequency hopping (where the multiple more directions have to be covered this scattered WPs are learnt to follow various arranged as an example by A1 complemented selectable hopping schemes of carrier by A2, A3, A4 etc and/or carriers
Thus 10,0 and 10,1 is in this case considered ■ combinations of sharing principles to being prepared for fewer WPs and user ■ omni-directional antennas (including ports than the station type called 10/10/1 TDM/TDMA mode, FDM/FDMA mode, Further below are station 10' considered to CDM (Code Division Multιplexιng)/CDMA represent a general available connectionless and or combinations switch and/or router as mentioned in figures ■ spatial communication via directed 16, 17 and 18 and 10" is considered to antennas (etc ) between them as also represent an external network which users been described in relation to figures 29 a, is applicable and/or where such coding is b, c, d, e included in an overlayered protocol etc
Figure 32 a, b, c Regardless such a protocol is applicable or not by including the protocol (as a lower layer
The figures visualise some additional protocols) invisible for other than W-SENS information to figure 19 and its description It application, carriers are prepared to be used in show a use of an added protocol to carriers in such a way if required I e depending on the this case demonstrated by two transfer requirement and/or the air protocol required channels Block a) and Block b) separated in time segment In the example is Block "a" Figure 32 d assumed to typically carry users data and Various types of integrated applications Block "b" typically carry signalling, error including services for data communication, detection, error corrections codes etc telecommunication, media distribution etc is repeatedly on each sub-channel, as also thought to be applicable in W-SENS networks shown in figure 19 The idea with figure is to generally visualise methods functions and means included for
In 32 b is shown how the various Blocks are establishing communication between ports separated in time with normally a higher ■ traffic requirements between ports (UPs number of bytes for data transfer and less and/or TPs is identified either manually, number of bytes for signalling It is also shown and/or automatically measured and/or to include possible interruptions in the data ■ mechanisms to adopt the transfer rate in flow to repeatedly occur when Bloch "b" the W-SENS network for required transfer (signalling information etc ) is transferred It is capacity is applied (by routing between visualise that a consecutive time interruption stations, bandwidth allocation, modulation P1 is possible to co-ordinate under time of a level adjustment etc per pair of WPs Block "b" Method functions and means are involved) included to allow a seamless transparent flow ■ WPs are arranged at station to establish of user information etc regardless of transparent synchronous communication
■ selection of time segments where changes between corresponding stations and of frequency (including repeatedly respective WPs frequency hopping is used, ■ bandwidth and transfer capacity is
■ changes of number of sub-carriers, selected in the In and out direction of each
■ changes of modulation levels WP (exemplified between station 10 and
■ time to change selection of alternative 11 out represents at10+bt10 and in codes on applied data ar11+br11)
■ time segments realisation including frame ■ manually and/or automatically selection of structures transfer capacity is included applicable
■ changes of modulation level, depending on user requirements quality of
■ radio transmitter power level service etc possible routing alternatives etc
I e changes as mentioned above are not unnecessarily interfering with ongoing data The port 100 is visualising an example of a flow Additionally including P1 timing applicable port operating at a capacity in dual direction of to TDMA applications where one or multiple Fast Ethernet and/or Gigabit Ethernet and/or timeframes between P1 s is included to be STM - 1 etc possible to be used as time frames The WP from station 10 - 11 is at the time shown set to an unbalanced rate indicating
Figure 32 c shows principally that the more transfer capacity being allocated from illustrated time separation of blocks of various station 10 to 11 then the opposite way size on carriers to make mentioned It is also visualised that if the WP of 10 where functionality's applicable in addition include a equipped for multiple directions either via a transparent flow utilisation, a+b, by an separate WP (or sub-WP) at 10 or via an P-MP overplayed logical protocol if this is deemed arrangement of the same WP thet is used to applicable, as it may in cases for point-point station 11 The transfer capacity through the WPs (sub-WPs) with very few changes of air between station 10 and 12 is shown to be transfer speeds on carriers, number of carriers, differently selected in comparison to station 10 frequency or where principally no error and 12 It is further illustrated that the capacity detection coding and/or error correction coding flow towards station 12 is less than in the opposite direction alternatives for local and/or remote transferees
The dotted lined 100 TL indicates application possible Incoming data (on CH1 CH3) from of logical protocol from the station 10 to an another station and WP arrives from the air via applied WP, which is detectable at WP and the antenna system, receiver, demodulator, reappropriate, applied signalling, is transferable packing functions unit DTO etc entering into to the other corresponding station, included the switch functions 2* Received to the switch switching and/or routing instructions etc in packet forms this data can either be possible 100 RL includes logical protocol from the WP to control to be terminated fully or partly at a to the station 10 and in fact it includes possible location via one or several ports (PTE) or protocols from other stations concerned transferred to port 1 PTE It can in addition fully Any required signalling for stations, user ports or partly be transferred to the same or another terminal ports, network management ports etc WP, i e eventually in another direction via one is applicable to be transferred between each or a number of ports (PAI) pair of WPs
Communication protocols between pair of WP Methods functions and means include includes fast assignments and/or de- ■ co-ordination of transferees through WPs assignment of capacity, bandwidth in selected on overlapping directions which either risks steps of sub-carriers, modulation level, error to interfere and/or actually interfere with coding other WPs or sub-WPs is to co-ordinated is at least controllable via frequency
IP addressing of communications unit bandwidth selection for any WP identifications is included Using ■ timing control between WPs operating in connectionless switching based on IP leads to P-MP mode on overlapping frequencies the possible include of addressing set-up ■ means for other counter measures to supervision and control from any port handle interference and/or optimise 210/210*/200 and or user ports (100 etc ) as transfer quality in general is applicable for well WP transfers
■ speed control (or modulation level or type)
Figure 33 per sub-channel, frequency bandwidth
The figure shows an example of one of many control, coding, and error correction possible ways of realisation of functions of a ■ controlling the balance of traffic basic station and/or WP function, based on the requirements between WPs and stations in method and sub-methods mentioned It is just order to make it possible to deliver multiple shown as an example to verify the possibility to communications service transfers with realise a W-SENS approach based on a limited priority between users and or application number of basic functional core units It is of and/or types of transfers, example course only one example and many other seamless synchronous or synchronous possibilities to realise stations WPs ports etc data is higher prioritised than interactive would be possible data
The use of connectionless switching is An example given below shows the possible considered in the example capacity strengths of a W-SENS solution A fast switching and/or routing functional unit Consider the use of a switching functional unit 2* typically arranged for high capacity transfer platform 2* that can support high capacity and fast switching routing capability is shown ports, include connection of 10 Mbit/s 100 in the figure A number of ports are principally Mbit s, 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet standard ports shown be to be possible to connect to 2* The (and/or indirectly transport of standard ATM number and the specific types of ports would SDH SONET ports up to at least 155 Mbit/s) depend in actual requirement type or ports and Further estimates that such switch function connections to 2* could vary from installation to would be capable of switching multiple 1 Gbit/s installation A possible network management ports and that all basic switch functions could port 210olP is visualised be physically realised in one or a few chip sets Thus, considering as an example figure 31a i e at neglected production cost and size and figure 33 it is shown how data from a local Thus, every W-SENS stations would be application can be transferred via the switch to capable of transferring (switch/route) multiple a number of possible WPs to the wanted of Gbit/s through the air lets exemplify the direction and corresponding WP and station effect using a switch capacity of about 10-16 Gigabit/s
The figure generally illustrates the multiple I e each new station at each new location is direction and multiple possible switching potential increasing the total transfer capacity in the air for a geographical region functions for protocol analyse volume analyse considerable and in addition it allow for for bandwidth requirements, re-structure of multiple more routes to be applied by using received data are represented by DTO and multiple WPs Thus every new station is DTI potentially adding capacity to be possible to be Additional signalling is applicable to the data utilised by other stations and users in a certain flow between WPs for the actual control of geographical area and/or it allow expansion of communication between WPs the area service coverage New station allow DIQR and DIQT represent digital interfaces shortened hop lengths, increased routing towards modulator (567) and demodulator alternatives, reduced transmission power, (552) arrangements increased spectrum utilisation etc which is The signal 2110T* represent transmit control further helping to better utilise every such new functional signals including of settings of the station for the air and/or potentially for the transfer flow between the actual WPs and/or ground application (at customers locations as sub-WPs (like fig 5 570) etc for various types well) in combination of WPs for point - point or point - multipoint modes of operation This includes control of
Example, a group of 10 000 stations (16 Gbit/s data to be transmitted, buffer memory x 10 000) spread in a city represents a total performance - overload etc based on queuing switching and potential transfer capacity on buffer memory, detection of capacity through the air of 160 Terabit/s requirement of prioritised data transfer - like In order to control the flow between the ports of synchronous and seamless synchronous 2* and to control communications between WP communication, quality performance etc I e it are a functional processing unit included where represents the base for speed control - software programs include to execute the modulation level settings, level of error mentioned method function and means in detection and correction, etc i e to balance combination with hardware and firm ware the actual transfer requirement through the air included In the example given is such with the actual traffic capacity and type of functional unit represented by 566/1 It is traffic to be transferred via the WPs connected to the switch 2* and it performs its The signal 2101 R* represent receive control control of other functional units typically via the including and supervision of received data switch I e the ability to interact between data quality, instructions from the corresponding to be transmitted and or received via the air is data received quality at the actual site managed via an interaction between DTI, DTO including receiving of quality performance of and 566/1 The functional units shown could be the other end, receive of instructions from the a built in microprocessor for each WP or other end regarding modulation changes, optionally the process and control mechanism carrier changes, coding changes, frequency may be running on another processor located changes etc at another switch, and or WP etc I e the The internal control and signalling of respective mentioned processor 566/1 may also include WPs transmission devices including antenna functions to handle similar processes for other control is represented generally by 2101 , 2102, switches at other stations and their WPs etc 2103 Optionally network management ports include connection via processing unit port 210 An internal and/or externally applied memory function supposed to handle interactive data
The shown fast switch allow transparent flow of transfer under the time the transfer rate data between is ports, 1 PAI yPAI and available between WPs are less than peek 1 PTE xPTE for synchronous or asynchronous data allowed is visualised by 551/M and/or type of data flows requirements with a 551 MUP (figure 5) minimum delay, i e to allow for traffic routing to As an example only considering a port 1 PTE is pass multiple stations with insignificant time applicable to Gigabit Ethernet (1000 Mbit/s in delays for most standards application Internal and out to the WP) and that 200 Mbit s is the buffer memories are considered built in and maximum capacity to be possible to transfer in additional memories are included for functions each direction between a specific pair of WPs as descπber fig 12 551/M, i e applicable to Consider that synchronised and/or seamless increase the efficiently of handling interactive data applied to be transferred is "tagged" with data transfer bandwidth allocations appropriate IP signalling i e which would allow DIR and DIT interfaces represent the digital such data packets to be analysed at WP to serial format towards the air transmission indicate the transfer rate required to arrange to functions The functional units for data that is allow for a transparent transfer in real time organised for air transmission, including If the transfer volume is considered to be Error indication encapsulation type Ipv4 and transferred in such particular case is detected Ipvδ indication and the IP header checksum to be about 50 Mbit/s and the maximum result capacity where 200 Mbit/s and if 70 Mbit/s where already allocated for similar traffic The switch function 2* would be possible as an (synchronous) The available transfer capacity example to manufactured highly integrated or for interactive data communication remaining as an ASIC circuit basically which in addition would be about 200 -(70+50)= 80 Mbit/s may include principally other at least logical electronics functional blocks of the exemplified
Methods functions and means is applied for station The use of highly integrated analysing data transfer requirements components would make it possible assign considered being required to be sent as real WPs or stations virtually on roof tops behind a time data and/or interactively small antenna system for high frequency radio One example is to "tag" and detect real time (typically > 10 GHz) or laser heads for such data with protocols higher priority than other transmission means data Method functions and means are thus Radio heads laser transmitters receivers etc included to enable handling of differently on high frequencies where at least radio heads tagged data separated should be possible to design for highly
■ data applied for interactivity accepting integrated lowest possible transmission power variable delays and speeds is possible to level and dissipation making it economically differentiate from data requiting constant and physically attractive to connect them at speeds antennas horns Thus directly assigned to
■ data transfers accepting variable speeds stations and or WPs on antennas or separated include the routing via intermediate via intermediate cables as been previously memories 551 M etc to handle the traffic described peaks by smoothing out the transfer time delay when the capacity through WPs is This could be specifically valuable to arrange less then a temporary need as it reduces RF loss and the required output
■ control of delay performance, statistics on power of the radio head to a minimum accumulated bits/bytes etc on 551 M is Methods functions and means are included to included basically use platforms of low power radio
■ record transfer volume requirements is to heads but make it possible to reach longer watch the load on memory (551 M) use of highly integrated low power basic associated between the PTE port and the radio heads DIT ■ add extra radio transmission power when
■ data requiring synchronous and/or needed at specific horns/antennas etc by seamless synchronous transfer capacity the use of adding optional buffer power between ports is analysed and it is amplifier secured that enough data capacity is ■ disconnect added buffer radio power assigned for such transfer under the time amplifiers when appropriate routing the requirement occur alternatives occurs xxxxxxx Gradually would less need for the added power
Traffic terminated to users and/or other station amplifiers be required when new hops are functions is here market 100T and 100R etc or established The radio extra buffer radio level traffic to and from WP and other WPs are would be possible to reduce in emission in generally market 110T and 110R etc accordance and possibly disconnected at Alternative marking of the ports are certain time and re-used if needed This is to 1 PAI yPAI which is aimed for the air and the illustrate one of many practical implementation ports to other WPs or stations functions The arrangements to realise systems based on the ports 1 PTE xPTE represents the ports to W-SENS method efficiently other station functions or and/or user applications The type of interfaces considered At the top of the figure is generally visualised to be included is as an example full duplex how data principally could be applied from user Ethernet 1000 Mbit/s and/or 100 Mbit s full traffic PTx, how signalling for the other WP is duplex and/or half duplex and/or 10 Mbit s half originated by a real or distant virtual 566/1 and duplex applied on two of the sub-channels in the
The packet decoder could include support of example However this is only general Ethernet II, IEEE 802 3/802 2 SNAP, IEEE examples and may have nothing to do with 803 3/802 2, Netware 802 3 RAW for IPX only actual application of information on sub- carriers A similar case is shown for the Effective and increased transfer capability received data It also include signalling - modulation speed and number of information from a corresponding WP (shown possible routes are increased as 211 OR*) which could be used at appropriate Effective and increased redundancy - the processing function 566/1 and/or transferred routing alternatives are increased with further increasing number of stations applied in an area
Methods functions and means as well as some Increased possible capability in the air by various possible implementation examples into the gradual increased possible number of system solutions have been shown applicable termination points to other backbone - as for a new communications network approach this offloads some traffic as its nearest serving scattered users by utilising wireless termination point becomes possible to communication, radio and light-wave alternate or becoming closer and the need effectively The method include to transfer bulks of data through the air is
■ adaptive wireless connections in pair of generally decreased ports between stations Automatic network capacity expansion with
■ stations equipped including fast and high increased possibility to serve more users capacity switches which could the ports of the more users served with further wireless switches to communicate with users and/or connections and/or switching/routing the air for communication with users capability of other traffic, connected other stations multi frequency arrangement of each
■ comprehensive network architectures with station including various radio wave self growing capabilities virtually adaptable carriers and light waves, to unlimited topologies applicable to work as backbone for external wireless access solution - by
No other known wireless solution could offer a letting other access system utilise any of similar capacity, flexibility, cost and frequency the switching functions of a station effectiveness applicable to work as extension to fibre based communication - as high capacity
Examples of some of the included features as including 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s and up shown in this document for such networks are against 1000 Mbit/s transparent transfer
■ Supports synchronous transfer balanced for multiple users is applicable and unbalanced communication in/out of applicable to replace fibre based solution - each WP based on the extreme high area capacity
■ Support seamless synchronous transfer - capability, cost effectiveness even for short as voice image transfer based on IP hops, quickness to establish, upgrade or protocols remove according to various requirements
Supports transparent transfer of applied applicable to replace traditional radio links synchronous signals based on other - for fixed communication bandwidth protocols than IP, i e ATM, SDH, SONET, between points only transfer of synchronous signals based on supports resource sharing in space, ITU-T access and/or transmission elevation, frequency - power regulation, specifications, media distribution J-PEG of planning rescheduling of routes increase various formats etc possible increased variation in elevations,
■ Support asynchronous transfer - effective shortens hops, increase the possibility to share of capacity even at peak loads transfer on higher speeds to maintained
■ Increasingly more and more cost effective quality the more users connected - shorter hops supports equipment resource sharing of less electromagnetic power required radio and or radio and modem in time
■ Increasingly more transfer capacity and/or and/or frequency and/or code - by the use better utilisation of frequency spectrum the of variations of P-MP schemes more users connected - higher modulation supports both spatial and optionally omnilevel and higher transfer rate adoptions directional approaches - by the use of with shorter hop between stations, more directed narrow beam antennas, laser routing alternatives beams etc , sector antennas
■ Effective and gradually increased supports access connection frequency reuse - the more stations the support broadcast traffic more variations in elevations and the supports end to end communication shorter the hops the less transmission between users connected to the stations power to maintain transmission quality also without routing via a network hierarchy - supports all to all communication between stations - i.e. any station that radio optically can see another one can also principally be connected

Claims

1. A station for wireless switching and communication comprising: at least one wireless port (WP) for wireless communication with another station; at least one port (UP/TP) for communication with a user or a network; an internal switching unit for switching (routing) traffic between stations and/or ports.
2. A station according to claim 1, wherein the wireless port has a controllable bandwidth.
3. A station according to claim 2, wherein the bandwidth is controlled by means of an OFDM modem.
4. A station according to claim 3, wherein the bandwidth utilised by the modem is controlled by varying the number of subchannels used, varying the modulation type and/or level, varying the transmission power, varying the error correction, and/or varying the antenna gain and/or polarisation.
5. A station according to claim 4, wherein the OFDM modem is adapted to control the transmission power of the subchannels so that it simulates the profile of a single carrier channel.
6. A station according to claim 2, wherein the wireless port is capable of emulating various wireless standards and protocols and resource sharing schemes such as FDMA, TDMA, spread spectrum, frequency hopping or CDMA or combinations of them.
7. A station according to claim 2, wherein the wireless port is capable of adapting the bandwidth utilised in response to external control signals and/or quality measurements and/or available bandwidth.
8. A station according to claim 7, comprising a memory for intermediate storing data when peaks of data between wireless ports are higher than the bandwidth available between wireless ports.
9. A station according to claim 3, 6, or 7, wherein the wireless port comprises a directional and/or adaptive antenna system for SDMA.
10. A station according to claim 9,wherein the antenna system is arranged to provide a number of main lobes in wanted directions for each wireless port.
11. A station according to claim 10,wherein a wireless port is arranged to select directions which may overlap in area and time with another parallel wireless port with either separation in frequency and/or time segments.
12. A station according to claim 10,wherein a wireless port is arranged to control lobes in specific selected directions in selected time fragments with time division.
13. A station according to claim 1, further comprising a network management port (NMP) for communication with an external network management unit.
14. A station according to claim 1, wherein the switching unit is capable of switching so fast that only negligible delays occur.
15. A station according to claim 14, wherein the switching unit is capable of switching 10, 100, and 1000 Mbit/s of data.
16. A station according to claim 1, wherein the switching unit is adapted both to connectionless and circuit-oriented switching and conversion therebetween.
17. A station according to claim 16, wherein the connectionless switching is based on packet switching and/or IP protocols.
18. A station according to claim 16, wherein the circuit-oriented switching is based on ATM.
19. A station according to claim 16, wherein the switching unit is adapted to convert a synchronous flow that shall be transmitted over the station to an appropriate asynchronous form with an appropriate signalling protocol including addresses for such transfer, including means to apply IP signalling protocols.
20. A network for wireless switching and communication comprising a number of stations each having: at least one wireless port (WP) for wireless communication with another station; at least one port (UP/TP) for communication with a user or a network; and an internal switching unit for switching (routing) traffic between stations and/or ports, further comprising a network management unit capable of adding and deleting stations in the network.
21. A network for wireless switching and communication comprising a number of stations each having: at least one wireless port (WP) for wireless communication with another station; at least one port (UP/TP) for communication with a user or a network; and an internal switching unit for switching (routing) traffic between stations and/or ports, wherein some stations are capable of functioning as repeating and terminal stations.
22. A network for wireless switching and communication comprising a number of stations each having: at least one wireless port (WP) for wireless communication with another station; at least one port (UP/TP) for communication with a user or a network; and an internal switching unit for switching (routing) traffic between stations and/or ports, further comprising an external switching unit for controlling the internal switching units of the stations.
23. A network according to claim 22, wherein the external switching unit is adapted to set up alternative routes between stations.
24. A network for wireless switching and communication comprising a number of stations each having: at least one wireless port (WP) for wireless communication with another station; at least one port (UP/TP) for communication with a user or a network; and an internal switching unit for switching (routing) traffic between stations and/or ports, wherein complementary parallel routes are set up between pairs of stations.
25. A network according to claim 24, wherein one complementary parallel route is a radio channel, e.g. low bandwidth microwave, and the other complementary parallel route is a high bandwidth laser channel.
26. A network for wireless switching and communication comprising a number of stations each having: at least one wireless port (WP) for wireless communication with another station; at least one port (UP/TP) for communication with a user or a network; and an internal switching unit for switching (routing) traffic between stations and/or ports, wherein some stations are capable of establishing point to multipoint communication.
27. A network according to claim 26, wherein a wireless port is adapted to work as a central for other wireless ports, sharing its capacity with a number of underlying wireless ports, such underlying wireless ports being able to commonly share its capacity with the central wireless port.
28. A network according to claim 26, wherein a wireless port, which is sharing its capacity with other stations, and working as an underlying wireless port to these other stations is adapted to share its transmission resource capacity with other stations as a central.
29. A network according to claim 26, wherein a wireless port which is working as an underlying station towards a central is adapted to work as an underlying wireless port to other central wireless ports.
30. A network according to claim 26, wherein some stations are capable of establishing multipoint to multipoint communication.
31. A network for wireless switching and communication comprising a number of stations each having: at least one wireless port (WP) for wireless communication with another station; at least one port (UP/TP) for communication with a user or a network; and an internal switching unit for switching (routing) traffic between stations and/or ports, wherein the network is capable of emulating generic access systems.
32. A network according to claim 31, wherein a wireless port is adapted to be connected to one station and virtually work as a standard terminal to another manufacturer's base station.
33. A network according to claim 31, wherein a wireless port is adapted to be connected to a station arranged to operate as if it was a station in a wireless access system and to manage appropriate standards for the access system and/or such station's interaction with other switching and/or routing systems.
34. A network arrangement consisting of stations that can establish communication between each other through ports to/from external users or networks including transactions through the air, which stations include switching and may include routing functions and may include a selected number of wireless ports (WP) consisting of modems and transmitters/receivers for electromagnetic transactions where: a total network functionality is formed by a switching/routing network and a wireless network, where the switching/routing units may allocate required bandwidth and speed for transactions through a wireless communication network, including adaptation of various wireless transaction capacities between selected ports according to traffic requirements detected by switches in the total network, where the wireless network, which is formed by an aggregated number of ports located at a selected number of stations, include adaptive capacity assignment capability.
35. A port unit for wireless switching and communication for connection to a station having: at least one wireless port (WP) for wireless communication with another station; at least one port (UP/TP) for communication with a user or a network; and an internal switching unit for switching (routing) traffic between stations and/or ports, the port unit comprising a modem and a radio unit and being arranged to be controlled by a control program through the station to which it is connected.
PCT/SE2000/001950 1999-10-07 2000-10-06 Network arrangement, station for wireless switching, and port unit therefor WO2001024600A2 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
AU79801/00A AU7980100A (en) 1999-10-07 2000-10-06 Network arrangement, station for wireless switching, and port unit therefor

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
SE9903603A SE9903603D0 (en) 1999-10-07 1999-10-07 W-sense
SE9903603-0 1999-10-07

Publications (3)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2001024600A2 true WO2001024600A2 (en) 2001-04-12
WO2001024600A3 WO2001024600A3 (en) 2001-11-15
WO2001024600A9 WO2001024600A9 (en) 2002-09-06

Family

ID=20417264

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/SE2000/001950 WO2001024600A2 (en) 1999-10-07 2000-10-06 Network arrangement, station for wireless switching, and port unit therefor

Country Status (3)

Country Link
AU (1) AU7980100A (en)
SE (1) SE9903603D0 (en)
WO (1) WO2001024600A2 (en)

Cited By (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2002063836A3 (en) * 2001-02-09 2003-04-17 Nokia Corp A data communication system
WO2004004219A3 (en) * 2002-06-28 2004-08-19 Belair Networks Inc Integrated wireless distribution and mesh backhaul networks
DE10347231A1 (en) * 2003-10-07 2005-05-04 Univ Ilmenau Tech Data transmission device e.g. for multi hop radio network, has base station and several relay stations and mobile station with components equipped with antenna array
WO2005099295A1 (en) * 2004-04-05 2005-10-20 Nokia Corporation System and method for initiating auxiliary communication interfaces via a primary communication interface
US8995573B1 (en) 2012-10-23 2015-03-31 Dragonwave, Inc. Octagonal quadrature amplitude modulation
EP2062365B1 (en) 2006-09-15 2017-06-07 Thales Avionics, Inc. System and method for wirelessly transferring content to and from an aircraft
US9847828B2 (en) 2013-12-18 2017-12-19 X Development Llc Adjusting beam width of air-to-ground communications based on distance to neighbor balloon(s) in order to maintain contiguous service
CN114979285A (en) * 2022-05-10 2022-08-30 百果园技术(新加坡)有限公司 Service calling method, device, equipment, system, storage medium and product

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5623495A (en) * 1995-06-15 1997-04-22 Lucent Technologies Inc. Portable base station architecture for an AD-HOC ATM lan
BR9709718A (en) * 1996-06-13 1999-08-10 Northern Telecom Ltd Wide area wireless distribution system
US5991284A (en) * 1997-02-13 1999-11-23 Qualcomm Inc. Subchannel control loop

Cited By (15)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2002063836A3 (en) * 2001-02-09 2003-04-17 Nokia Corp A data communication system
US8520578B2 (en) 2002-06-28 2013-08-27 Belair Networks Inc. Integrated wireless distribution and mesh backhaul networks
WO2004004219A3 (en) * 2002-06-28 2004-08-19 Belair Networks Inc Integrated wireless distribution and mesh backhaul networks
US7164667B2 (en) 2002-06-28 2007-01-16 Belair Networks Inc. Integrated wireless distribution and mesh backhaul networks
US7693105B2 (en) 2002-06-28 2010-04-06 Belair Networks Inc. Integrated wireless distribution and mesh backhaul networks
US8009562B2 (en) 2002-06-28 2011-08-30 Belair Networks Inc. Integrated wireless distribution and mesh backhaul networks
US8483066B2 (en) 2002-06-28 2013-07-09 Belair Networks Inc. Integrated wireless distribution and mesh backhaul networks
DE10347231A1 (en) * 2003-10-07 2005-05-04 Univ Ilmenau Tech Data transmission device e.g. for multi hop radio network, has base station and several relay stations and mobile station with components equipped with antenna array
WO2005099295A1 (en) * 2004-04-05 2005-10-20 Nokia Corporation System and method for initiating auxiliary communication interfaces via a primary communication interface
EP2062365B1 (en) 2006-09-15 2017-06-07 Thales Avionics, Inc. System and method for wirelessly transferring content to and from an aircraft
US8995573B1 (en) 2012-10-23 2015-03-31 Dragonwave, Inc. Octagonal quadrature amplitude modulation
US9847828B2 (en) 2013-12-18 2017-12-19 X Development Llc Adjusting beam width of air-to-ground communications based on distance to neighbor balloon(s) in order to maintain contiguous service
US10230453B2 (en) 2013-12-18 2019-03-12 Loon Llc Maintaining contiguous ground coverage with high altitude platforms
CN114979285A (en) * 2022-05-10 2022-08-30 百果园技术(新加坡)有限公司 Service calling method, device, equipment, system, storage medium and product
CN114979285B (en) * 2022-05-10 2024-02-27 百果园技术(新加坡)有限公司 Service calling method, device, equipment, system, storage medium and product

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2001024600A9 (en) 2002-09-06
AU7980100A (en) 2001-05-10
SE9903603D0 (en) 1999-10-07
WO2001024600A3 (en) 2001-11-15

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
Jaber et al. 5G backhaul challenges and emerging research directions: A survey
Chia et al. The next challenge for cellular networks: Backhaul
US6597668B1 (en) System and method for maximizing efficiency in a time division duplex system employing dynamic asymmetry
US8223726B2 (en) Metropolitan wide area network
RU2158490C2 (en) Distributed radio communication system
EP0999717A2 (en) Broadband wireless mesh topology network
US6757268B1 (en) Metropolitan wide area network
US20020077151A1 (en) Polymorphic cellular network architecture
RU2117395C1 (en) Method for wide-range communication system and wide-range communication system which implements said method
US20090029645A1 (en) Multi-Tier Backhaul Network System with Traffic Differentiation and Advanced Processing Capabilities and Methods Therefor
JP2002529017A (en) Broadband wireless mesh topology network
AU8383898A (en) A wireless system for providing symmetrical, bidirectional broadband telecommunications and multimedia services employing a computer-controlled radio system
WO1998058477A1 (en) Metropolitan wide area network
CN107637027B (en) System, method and storage medium for communication between base stations in a radio access network
HU215310B (en) Method for operating tdma digital wide area radio system with at least two subsystems
CN100544508C (en) Network planning method for mobile network infrastructure and mobile network
US7242907B2 (en) System and method for inband signaling for sector synchronization in a wireless communication system
Zhang et al. Low latency integrated point-to-multipoint and E-band point-to-point backhaul for mobile small cells
JP4852208B2 (en) Multi-layer communication network
WO2001024600A2 (en) Network arrangement, station for wireless switching, and port unit therefor
AU754649B2 (en) Metropolitan wide area network
Wu et al. Overview of WiMAX Standards and Applications
WO2009107144A1 (en) A method and system for channel assignment in rural wireless mesh networks
MXPA99004266A (en) System and method for broadband millimeter wave data communication

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY BZ CA CH CN CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VN YU ZA ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW MZ SD SL SZ TZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A3

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY BZ CA CH CN CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VN YU ZA ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A3

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW MZ SD SL SZ TZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

COP Corrected version of pamphlet

Free format text: PAGES 10-72, DESCRIPTION, REPLACED BY NEW PAGES 10-119; PAGES 73-76, CLAIMS, RENUMBERED AS 120-123;DUE TO LATE TRANSMITTAL BY THE RECEIVING OFFICE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase
NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP